WO2015015781A1 - Paper-sheet-binding device - Google Patents

Paper-sheet-binding device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015015781A1
WO2015015781A1 PCT/JP2014/003918 JP2014003918W WO2015015781A1 WO 2015015781 A1 WO2015015781 A1 WO 2015015781A1 JP 2014003918 W JP2014003918 W JP 2014003918W WO 2015015781 A1 WO2015015781 A1 WO 2015015781A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
tape
banknote
unit
banknotes
paper sheet
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2014/003918
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
善和 光定
小林 斉
Original Assignee
グローリー株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by グローリー株式会社 filed Critical グローリー株式会社
Priority to CN201480034504.3A priority Critical patent/CN105307942B/en
Publication of WO2015015781A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015015781A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65BMACHINES, APPARATUS OR DEVICES FOR, OR METHODS OF, PACKAGING ARTICLES OR MATERIALS; UNPACKING
    • B65B27/00Bundling particular articles presenting special problems using string, wire, or narrow tape or band; Baling fibrous material, e.g. peat, not otherwise provided for
    • B65B27/08Bundling paper sheets, envelopes, bags, newspapers, or other thin flat articles

Definitions

  • the technology disclosed herein relates to a paper sheet bundling apparatus that binds collected paper sheets with a tape.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a bundling device for bundling paper sheets with a tape.
  • this binding device banknotes are stacked in the stacking unit, and the stacked banknotes are conveyed to the binding unit and bound. Thereafter, the bundled banknotes are conveyed to the dispensing unit.
  • the stamp is made on the tape by the stamping portion.
  • the technique disclosed here is made in view of such a point, and is to easily and accurately stamp a tape for binding paper sheets.
  • the technique disclosed herein is intended for a paper sheet bundling apparatus that bundles collected paper sheets with a tape.
  • the paper sheet bundling device includes a clamp unit that compresses the stacked paper sheets from both sides in the stacking direction, a bundling unit that binds the paper sheets compressed by the clamp unit with the tape, and stamps the tape.
  • a stamping portion, and the stamping portion compresses the paper sheet with the clamp portion and stamps the tape with the tape wound around the paper sheet.
  • the position of the paper sheets is fixed.
  • the tape is wound around the paper sheet whose position has been determined, the position of the tape is generally determined. That is, since the position of the tape is known when the paper sheets are bundled in a state compressed by the clamp portion, it is possible to easily and accurately stamp the tape by performing the stamping at this timing.
  • stamp portion may be stamped from the stacking direction.
  • the paper sheet bundling device includes a joining part that joins the tapes in a state where the tape is wound around the paper sheets, and a cutting part that cuts the tape at a position where the tapes are not wound around the paper sheets.
  • the joining portion and the cutting portion may be disposed on one side of the paper sheet in the stacking direction, and the stamping portion may be disposed on the other side of the paper sheet in the stacking direction.
  • the joining portion, the cutting portion, and the pressing portion are arranged separately on both sides in the paper stacking direction, the placement space for the joining portion and the cutting portion and the placement space for the stamp portion are reduced. Each can be secured.
  • the paper sheet bundling device includes a joining portion that joins the tapes in a state where the tape is wound around the paper sheets, and a cutting portion that cuts the tape at a position where the tape is not wrapped around the paper sheets. And at least a part of the stamping process by the stamping part may be performed in a time-overlapping manner with the joining process by the joining part and / or the cutting process by the cutting part.
  • the stamp portion may be stamped from a direction orthogonal to the stacking direction.
  • the paper sheet bundling device includes a guide portion having a pair of side walls that regulate a position of the tape in the width direction when the tape is wound around the paper sheets, and the stamping portion is formed of the pair of side walls. You may arrange
  • the tape is wound around the paper sheet in a state where the position in the width direction of the tape is regulated by the guide portion.
  • the stamp part is arrange
  • the guide portion restricts the position in the width direction of the tape so as to substantially correspond to the stamp position by the stamp portion.
  • the paper sheet bundling device includes a printing unit that prints on the tape, and the stamping unit and the printing unit have a shift in the width direction of the tape between the position of the stamping by the stamping unit and the printing by the printing unit. They may be arranged so as not to overlap each other.
  • the position where the stamping portion is stamped with respect to the tape can be accurately set, so that the stamping position by the stamping portion and the printing by the printing portion are shifted in the width direction of the tape and overlap each other.
  • the position of the stamp by the stamp part can be set so that there is no.
  • the bundling portion includes a tape loop creating unit that creates a tape loop with the tape, and after the paper sheet is disposed in the tape loop, pulls the tape back and winds the tape around the paper sheet.
  • the tape ring creating section may include a feeding section that feeds out the tape when the tape loop is created, and the tape ring may be formed at a position lower than the feeding section.
  • the tape ring bulges downward from the delivery part, and finally the tape ring is created at a position lower than the delivery part. Since the tape is flexible, if the tape ring is inflated upward, a part of the tape ring may be bent downward due to the weight of the tape during the production of the tape ring. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the tape ring is inflated downward, the tape ring is not easily bent during the production of the tape ring. That is, the tape ring can be appropriately created.
  • the paper sheet bundling device it is possible to easily and accurately stamp a tape for bundling paper sheets.
  • FIG. 1 is an external view of a banknote handling apparatus.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic configuration diagram of the banknote handling apparatus.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic configuration diagram of the binding stacker and the binding unit.
  • 4A and 4B are perspective views of the tape gripping portion, where FIG. 4A shows a closed state of the tape gripping portion and FIG. 4B shows an open state of the tape gripping portion.
  • FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the tape loop creating unit.
  • FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the lower part of the tape ring creating unit as viewed obliquely from above.
  • FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the upper part of the tape loop creating part as seen from obliquely below.
  • FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the banknote handling apparatus.
  • FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the banknote handling apparatus.
  • FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of banknote compression processing in the binding stacker, where (A) shows a state immediately after completion of banknote accumulation, and (B) shows a state after completion of banknote compression.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the second transport unit has pulled out banknotes from the binding stacker.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the second transport unit transports the banknote to the side of the tape ring.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a state where the tape gripping part grips the leading end of the tape.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram of a state in which the tape gripping portion starts to rotate while gripping the leading end portion of the tape.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a state where the tape gripper has created a small tape ring.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a state in which the creation of the large tape ring is completed.
  • FIG. 16 is an operation explanatory diagram of each part until the banknote is conveyed to the large tape ring and gripped by the temporary gripping part when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote.
  • a state immediately before being conveyed to the large tape ring (B) shows a state in which the banknote is conveyed to the large tape ring, and (C) shows a state in which the banknote is gripped by the temporary gripping portion.
  • FIG. 17 is an operation explanatory view of each part until the banknote is conveyed to the large tape ring and gripped by the temporary gripping part when viewed in the short direction of the banknote. Is a state immediately before being conveyed to the large tape ring, (B) is a state where the banknote is conveyed to the large tape ring, and (C) is a state where the banknote is gripped by the temporary gripping portion.
  • FIG. 18 is an operation explanatory view of each part until the gripping unit picks up the banknote and the tape is wound around the banknote when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote.
  • FIG. 19 is an operation explanatory view of each part until the gripping unit picks up the banknote and the tape is wound around the banknote when viewed in the short direction of the banknote.
  • (B) shows a state in which the clamp portion presses the banknote
  • (C) shows a state in which the tape is wound around the banknote.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram of the state of the guide portion when the clamp portion presses the banknote.
  • FIG. 21 is an explanatory view of joining, cutting and stamping of the tape
  • (A) shows a state in which the first and second tape pressers hold the tape
  • (B) shows a heater welding the tape
  • the state where the cutter cut the tape is shown.
  • FIG. 22 is an operation explanatory view of each part until the bundled banknotes are thrown out to the dispensing unit when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknotes, and (A) shows the bundled banknotes in the second horizontal direction.
  • the extracted state, (B), shows a state where the third transport unit grips the bundled banknote
  • (C) shows a state where the third transport unit transports the bundled banknote to the dispensing unit.
  • FIG. 23 is an operation explanatory view of each part until the bundled banknotes are thrown out to the dispensing unit when viewed in the short direction of the banknotes, and (A) shows the bundled banknotes in the second horizontal direction. The state extracted to (B) shows a state in which the third transport unit grips the bundled banknotes.
  • FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a part for detecting the necessity of work in the banknote handling apparatus.
  • FIG. 25 is an operation explanatory diagram of each part until the bill is transported to the large tape ring and gripped by the temporary gripping portion and is held by the gripping unit when viewed in the thickness direction of the bill according to another embodiment.
  • (A) shows a state in which the banknote is conveyed to the large tape ring
  • (B) shows a state in which the gripping unit has picked up the banknote.
  • FIG. 1 shows an external view of the banknote handling apparatus 100
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic configuration diagram of the banknote handling apparatus 100.
  • the banknote handling apparatus 100 is installed, for example, in a bank teller counter and used by an operator.
  • the banknote handling apparatus 100 takes in banknotes in a loose state, accumulates predetermined types of banknotes, binds the banknotes in a predetermined number of bundles, and throws them out.
  • the banknote handling apparatus 100 is configured to stack a banknote on which a banknote is placed, a hopper section 2 that takes in the banknote, an identification section 3 that identifies the banknote, a binding stacker 4 that stacks banknotes to be bound, and a banknote that is not to be bound.
  • a second transport unit 8 that transports the banknotes accumulated in the binding stacker 4 to a predetermined position, a binding unit 9 that binds banknotes transported by the second transport unit 8, and a bundled banknote (hereinafter, “binding” 3rd conveyance part 10 which conveys a banknote ", the discharge part 11 which throws out a bundled banknote, the identification part 3, the bundling stacker 4, the non-bundling stacker 5, the reject stacker 6, the 1st conveyance part 7, 2 the conveyor 8, and a box-shaped casing 12 that houses the bundling unit 9 and the third conveying unit 10.
  • the housing 12 has an upper surface 121, a lower surface 122, and four side surfaces.
  • the housing 12 is a desktop type. That is, the lower surface 122 of the housing 12 is not provided with casters or the like, and is configured to be installed on a table.
  • the first side surface 123 that is one of the four side surfaces of the housing 12 is provided with the hopper portion 2 and the dispensing portion 11.
  • the second side surface 124 which is one of the four side surfaces, is provided with a first outlet 47 of the bundling stacker 4 and a second outlet 53 of the non-bundling stacker 5, which will be described in detail later.
  • the first side surface 123 and the second side surface 124 are adjacent to each other.
  • the inside of the housing 12 is divided into a first processing unit 126 that performs processing related to banknote identification and classification, and a second processing unit 127 that performs processing related to binding of banknotes to be bound.
  • the second processing unit 127 is provided above the first processing unit 126.
  • the first processing unit 126 includes a hopper unit 2, an identification unit 3, a non-binding stacker 5, and a reject stacker 6.
  • the second processing unit 127 includes a binding stacker 4, a second transport unit 8, a binding unit 9, and a third transport unit 10. Most of the first transport unit 7 is included in the first processing unit 126.
  • the binding stacker 4 includes two stackers, a first binding stacker 4A and a second binding stacker 4B. Both the first binding stacker 4A and the second binding stacker 4B accumulate the banknotes to be bound.
  • the banknotes accumulated as the banknotes to be bound can be set as appropriate.
  • the banknote to be bound is a predetermined type of banknote. The predetermined type is specified by the denomination, whether it is a correct or non-defective ticket, the front and back of the banknote, the direction of the banknote, whether it is a new or old ticket, and the like.
  • the banknote to be bound is a predetermined denomination (for example, 100 yuan) and a genuine banknote.
  • the banknotes identified as normal banknotes by the identification unit 3 are conveyed as “normal banknotes”, and the banknotes that are not identified as normal banknotes by the identification unit 3 are conveyed as “abnormal banknotes” by skew feeding or double feeding.
  • a banknote in which the state is abnormal is referred to as a “transport abnormal banknote”.
  • one of the conditions for determining whether or not the banknote is normal is whether or not the serial number can be identified. However, it may be determined whether the banknote is normal under different conditions, or another condition may be added to determine whether the banknote is normal.
  • non-designated banknote a banknote of a type in which a transport destination (a binding stacker, a non-binding stacker, etc.) is not designated.
  • non-designated banknote a banknote with a relatively small amount of dirt, tears, and the like
  • a banknote with a relatively large number of dirt, tears, and the like is referred to as a “damaged ticket”.
  • the bundling stacker 4 is an example of a stacking unit.
  • the first and second bundling stackers 4A and 4B are arranged substantially vertically in the second processing unit 127.
  • the first binding stacker 4A is located above the second binding stacker 4B.
  • the first bundling stacker 4A and the second bundling stacker 4B have the same configuration. When the two stackers are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as “binding stacker 4”. The detailed configuration of the bundling stacker 4 will be described later.
  • the non-bundling stacker 5 includes two stackers, the first and second non-bundling stackers 5A and 5B.
  • the first and second non-bundling stackers 5A and 5B are arranged side by side in a substantially horizontal direction in the first processing unit 126.
  • the second non-bundling stacker 5B is disposed closer to the hopper portion 2 than the first non-bundling stacker 5A.
  • unbound stacker 5 When the two stackers are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as “unbound stacker 5”.
  • the detailed configuration of the non-binding stacker 5 will be described later.
  • the banknotes stacked on the non-binding stacker 5 can be set as appropriate.
  • the first non-bundling stacker 5A is the predetermined denomination and accumulates non-use tickets.
  • the second non-binding stacker 5B accumulates banknotes of denominations other than the predetermined denomination.
  • the reject stacker 6 accumulates reject banknotes.
  • the reject stacker 6 is closer to the hopper portion 2 than the first and second unbundled stackers 5A and 5B.
  • the reject stacker 6 is positioned slightly above the first and second unbundled stackers 5A and 5B.
  • the detailed configuration of the reject stacker 6 will be described later.
  • the banknotes accumulated in the reject stacker 6 can be set as appropriate.
  • the reject stacker 6 accumulates “non-designated banknotes”, “abnormal banknotes”, and “conveyance abnormal banknotes” as reject banknotes.
  • the hopper unit 2 is provided in a portion corresponding to the first processing unit 126 in the first side surface 123, and the dispensing unit 11 is provided in a portion corresponding to the second processing unit 127 in the first side surface 123. .
  • the hopper unit 2 includes a mounting table 21 on which banknotes are mounted, two guide units 22 and 22 for guiding banknotes mounted on the mounting table 21, an intake roller 23, and an intake port for taking in banknotes. 24 and a banknote sensor 25 for detecting a banknote on the mounting table 21.
  • a banknote is mounted in the hopper part 2 so that a banknote is taken in a transversal direction.
  • the inlet 24 is formed at a corner where the mounting table 21 and the first side surface 123 intersect.
  • the mounting table 21 is inclined so as to be positioned downward as it approaches the intake port 24. Thereby, the banknote on the mounting table 21 goes to the intake port 24 naturally.
  • the banknotes placed on the placement table 21 are taken into the housing 12 from the take-in port 24.
  • the bill sensor 25 is provided in the vicinity of the intake port 24.
  • the banknote sensor 25 includes a transmission unit that transmits light and a reception unit that receives light, and detects a banknote by blocking light that is emitted from the transmission unit and reaches the reception unit.
  • the first bill sensor 45, the second bill sensor 46, the accumulation sensor 52, the accumulation sensor 62, the passage sensor 74, the first tape sensor 9210, the second tape sensor 9211, and the third tape sensor 926e described later have the same configuration. is doing.
  • the bill sensor 25 is arranged such that light is blocked by the bill placed on the placing table 21. That is, the bill sensor 25 can detect that a bill is placed on the placement table 21 by blocking light.
  • the guide portions 22 and 22 are configured so that the interval can be adjusted. That is, the interval between the guide portions 22 and 22 is adjusted according to the banknotes placed on the placement table 21.
  • the take-in roller 23 has a kicker roller 23a, a feed roller 23b, and a gate roller 23c.
  • the kicker roller 23 a is partially exposed from the mounting table 21 and is in contact with the lowest banknote among the banknotes on the mounting table 21.
  • the kicker roller 23 a feeds the lowest banknote out of the banknotes placed on the placing table 21 to the loading port 24. In this way, banknotes are taken one by one from the take-in port 24.
  • the bills fed from the take-in port 24 are separated one by one by the feed roller 23b and the gate roller 23c and taken into the housing 12.
  • the taken banknote is sent to the first transport unit 7.
  • the throwing-out part 11 has the throwing-out port 111 into which a bundled banknote is thrown out.
  • a bundled banknote is thrown out in the transversal direction of a banknote through the outlet 111.
  • the first transport unit 7 is composed of a transport belt or the like.
  • the first transport unit 7 includes a main transport path 71, first to fourth branch paths 72a to 72d branched from the main transport path 71, a sorting mechanism 73 provided at a branch point from the main transport path 71, and a bill And a plurality of passage sensors 74 for detecting the passage of.
  • the 1st conveyance part 7 conveys a banknote in the transversal direction.
  • the first transport unit 7 is an example of a transport unit.
  • the main transport path 71 extends from the take-in roller 23 to the first binding stacker 4A.
  • the first branch path 72a is located on the most upstream side of the main conveyance path 71, and from the first branch path 72a toward the downstream side, the second branch path 72b, the third branch path 72c, and the fourth branch path 72d. Are in this order.
  • the first to fourth branch paths 72a to 72d are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as a branch path 72.
  • the first branch path 72 a extends to the reject stacker 6.
  • the second branch path 72b extends to the second non-bundling stacker 5B.
  • the third branch path 72c extends to the first non-bundling stacker 5A.
  • the fourth branch path 72d extends to the second binding stacker 4B.
  • the distribution mechanism 73 is driven by a solenoid (not shown).
  • the sorting mechanism 73 sorts whether or not the bills transported through the main transport path 71 are branched to the branch path 72.
  • a passage sensor 74 is provided on the upstream side of each sorting mechanism 73.
  • the passage sensor 74 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25. That is, the passage of the banknote can be detected when the reception of light in the receiving unit of the passage sensor 74 is interrupted and the light reception is resumed thereafter.
  • the sorting mechanism 73 operates when the passage sensor 74 immediately upstream detects the passage of the bill when guiding the bill to the branch path 72.
  • the identification unit 3 is provided on the upstream side of the first branch path 72 a in the main transport path 71.
  • the identification unit 3 is configured to identify the denomination, authenticity, and correctness of each banknote to be conveyed.
  • the identification part 3 has the line sensor 31 and the magnetic sensor 32, and acquires the characteristic of a banknote.
  • the identification unit 3 determines whether the characteristics of the banknotes match the characteristics of the various banknotes stored therein, and identifies the denomination, authenticity, and correctness.
  • the identification part 3 is a sensor for acquiring the characteristic of a banknote, it will not be restricted to a line sensor and a magnetic sensor, You may have sensors, such as an infrared sensor and an ultraviolet sensor.
  • the line sensor 31 also has a function of optically reading the serial number printed on the banknote.
  • the control unit 120 described later may perform functions other than the sensor in the identification unit 3.
  • Bundle unit 9 binds stacked banknotes. As will be described in detail later, the bundling unit 9 creates a tape ring L, pulls the tape back after the banknote is conveyed into the tape ring L, and binds the banknote with the tape.
  • the second transport unit 8 grips the banknotes accumulated in the binding stacker 4 and transports the banknotes into the tape ring L.
  • the second transport unit 8 includes a gripping unit 81 that grips a banknote, and a first horizontal movement mechanism that moves the gripping unit 81 in the horizontal direction and the short direction of the banknote (hereinafter referred to as “first horizontal direction”).
  • first horizontal direction A second horizontal movement mechanism that moves the gripping unit 81 in the horizontal direction and in the longitudinal direction of the banknote
  • second horizontal direction a vertical movement mechanism that moves the gripping unit 81 in the vertical direction.
  • the second transport unit 8 is an example of a paper sheet transport unit.
  • the gripping unit 81 has an upper arm portion 81a, a lower arm portion 81b opposite to the upper arm portion 81a, and a gripping mechanism that moves the upper arm portion 81a in the vertical direction.
  • the upper arm portion 81a has three finger portions that extend in parallel to each other and a connecting portion that connects the three finger portions (see FIG. 16).
  • the lower arm portion 81b has three finger portions that extend in parallel to each other and a connecting portion that connects the three finger portions.
  • the gripping mechanism supports the upper arm portion 81a so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and moves the upper arm portion 81a up and down by a motor and a driving belt. Thereby, a banknote can be hold
  • the first horizontal movement mechanism supports the gripping unit 81 so as to be movable in the first horizontal direction, and moves the gripping unit 81 in the first horizontal direction by a motor and a driving belt.
  • the vertical movement mechanism supports the first horizontal movement mechanism so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and moves the first horizontal movement mechanism in the vertical direction by a motor and a driving belt.
  • the second horizontal movement mechanism supports the vertical movement mechanism so as to be movable in the second horizontal direction, and moves the vertical movement mechanism in the second horizontal direction by a motor and a driving belt.
  • the gripping unit 81 is configured to be movable in directions along three orthogonal axes by the first horizontal movement mechanism, the second horizontal movement mechanism, and the vertical movement mechanism.
  • the third transport unit 10 transports the bundled banknotes to the dispensing unit 11.
  • the third transport unit 10 includes an upper gripper 101, a lower gripper 102, and a horizontal movement mechanism that moves the upper gripper 101 and the lower gripper 102 in the first horizontal direction.
  • the horizontal movement mechanism moves the upper gripper 101 in the vertical direction when moving the upper gripper 101 in the first horizontal direction.
  • the third transport unit 10 is configured to pass through the side of the binding unit 9 in the first horizontal direction. When the third transport unit 10 is located on the side opposite to the projecting unit 11 with respect to the bundling unit 9, the upper gripping part 101 is sufficiently separated upward from the lower gripping part 102.
  • the upper gripping part 101 moves downward from this position as it approaches the bound banknote of the binding part 9, and when it reaches the bound banknote, the upper gripping part 101 and the lower gripper 102 grip the bound banknote.
  • the upper holding unit 101 and the lower holding unit 102 convey the bundled banknotes to the vicinity of the dispensing unit 11 while holding the bundled banknotes.
  • the upper gripping portion 101 moves upward in the vicinity of the throwing portion 11 as it approaches the throwing portion 11.
  • the bundled banknotes gripped by the upper gripping portion 101 and the lower gripping portion 102 are released from the upper gripping portion 101 and the lower gripping portion 102 in the dispensing portion 11 and are thrown out to the dispensing portion 11.
  • the second side surface 124 of the housing 12 is provided with a touch panel 17 that is an operation unit for inputting information to the banknote processing apparatus 100 and a display unit for displaying information on the banknote processing apparatus 100. It has been.
  • the touch panel 17 is a human interface part for an operator who operates the banknote handling apparatus 100.
  • FIG. 3 the schematic block diagram of the binding stacker 4 and the binding part 9 is shown.
  • Bundled stacker 4 stacks banknotes B and accumulates them.
  • the bundling stacker 4 includes a container 40 that accumulates banknotes B, a stage 41 that is placed in the container 40 and on which the banknotes B are placed, and the banknotes B that have been transported.
  • An impeller 42 to be carried in a door 43 that opens and closes a first outlet 47 to be described later, a top plate 44 that defines the ceiling of the container 40, a first banknote sensor 45 that detects the banknote B in the container 40, And a second banknote sensor 46 that detects a banknote B having a predetermined height in the container 40.
  • the container 40 is configured such that the front wall 40a on the front side in the conveyance direction of the bills B can be moved back and forth in the conveyance direction.
  • the position of the front wall 40a is adjusted according to the short direction dimension of the banknote B set as a binding target. Specifically, the banknote B carried into the container 40 hits the front wall portion 40a and falls to the bottom of the container 40 as it is, and is finally accumulated with the banknote B in contact with the front wall portion 40a.
  • the front wall portion 40a is disposed at a position where The front wall 40a is configured to open and close up and down.
  • the front wall portion 40 a is in an open state when the stacked banknotes B are conveyed by the second conveyance unit 8.
  • the stage 41 is configured to be movable up and down. For example, the stage 41 moves up and down according to the accumulation amount of the bills B.
  • the container 40 is opened on the second side surface 124 of the housing 12. That is, as shown in FIG. 1, the second side surface 124 is provided with a first outlet 47 for taking out the bills B accumulated in the bundling stacker 4 to the outside of the housing 12.
  • the door 43 is provided for each binding stacker 4 individually.
  • the door 43 is configured to be rotatable about a predetermined rotation axis between an open state in which the first outlet 47 is opened and a closed state in which the first outlet 47 is closed, and is manually opened and closed.
  • the door 43 is made of a material that allows the inside to be visually observed from the outside.
  • the door 43 is made of a transparent or translucent material (for example, glass or resin).
  • the impeller 42 has a plurality of flexible wings, and has a role of accelerating the falling of the banknote B by hitting the end of the banknote B falling in the container 40 on the rear side in the transport direction. is doing. Even when the banknotes B are continuously carried into the container 40, the subsequent banknotes B are prevented from entering the rear end of the preceding banknotes B, and the banknotes B are stacked one by one in order. I can go.
  • a plurality of first banknote sensors 45 are provided for each binding stacker 4.
  • two first banknote sensors 45 and 45 are provided at different positions in the conveyance direction of the banknote B in the container 40.
  • the first banknote sensor 45 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25.
  • Each first banknote sensor 45 is arranged to transmit light in the stacking direction of banknotes B in the container 40. That is, the 1st banknote sensor 45 can detect that the banknote B exists in the container 40 by light being interrupted
  • any one of the first bill sensors 45 The presence of the banknote B can be detected.
  • the 1st banknote sensor 45 may be provided with two or more in the different position in the direction (paper surface depth direction in FIG. 2) orthogonal to both the conveyance direction of the banknote B, and the thickness direction of the banknote B. As shown in FIG.
  • the second banknote sensor 46 is configured to detect the banknote B located at a predetermined height in the container 40.
  • the second banknote sensor 46 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25.
  • the second banknote sensor 46 blocks light from the transmitting section toward the receiving section by the banknote B, while the banknote B is higher than the predetermined height.
  • the light from the transmission unit is arranged to reach the reception unit.
  • non-bundling stacker 5 Since the first non-bundling stacker 5A and the second non-bundling stacker 5B have the same configuration, the following description will be made as the non-bundling stacker 5 without distinguishing between them.
  • the non-bundling stacker 5 stacks and stacks banknotes. As shown in FIG. 2, the non-bundling stacker 5 has a container 50 for collecting banknotes, an impeller 51 for carrying the conveyed banknotes into the container 50, and an accumulation sensor 52 for detecting the presence or absence of banknotes. is doing.
  • the bottom of the container 50 of the non-bundling stacker 5 is inclined. Thereby, the banknotes carried into the container 50 are collected at the lower end of the bottom.
  • the integrated sensor 52 is provided at the lower end of the bottom of the container 50.
  • the integrated sensor 52 has the same configuration as that of the banknote sensor 25, and detects banknotes in the container 50 by blocking light.
  • the integrated sensor 52 is arranged so that light is blocked by the banknotes in the container 50.
  • the impeller 51 has a plurality of wings, holds the conveyed banknote between the wings, and carries it into the container 50.
  • the banknotes are separated from the wings of the impeller 51 near the bottom of the container 50 and accumulated in the container 50.
  • the container 50 is open on the second side surface 124 of the housing 12. That is, the second side surface 124 is provided with a second outlet 53 for taking out the banknotes accumulated in the non-binding stacker 5 to the outside of the housing 12.
  • the second outlet 53 is not provided with a door and is open.
  • the second outlet 53 of the first non-bundling stacker 5A and the second outlet 53 of the second non-bundling stacker 5B are opened side by side in the horizontal direction on the second side surface 124.
  • the non-binding stacker 5 is provided with an extruding mechanism 54 for extruding the accumulated banknotes toward the second outlet 53.
  • the push-out mechanism 54 is provided on the back side (the side opposite to the second outlet 53) of the container 50, and is configured to push out banknotes from the back side to the front side (the second outlet 53 side). .
  • the reject stacker 6 stacks and stacks banknotes. As shown in FIG. 2, the reject stacker 6 includes a container 60 that accumulates banknotes, an impeller 61 that carries the conveyed banknotes into the container 60, an accumulation sensor 62 that detects the presence or absence of banknotes, and a container 60. It has stoppers 64 and 64 for preventing the banknotes from being discharged outside.
  • the container 60 of the reject stacker 6 is open to the first side surface 123 of the housing 12. That is, the first side surface 123 is provided with a reject outlet 63 for taking out the banknotes accumulated in the reject stacker 6 to the outside of the housing 12.
  • the reject outlet 63 opens above the inlet 24 on the first side surface 123.
  • the reject outlet 63 is not provided with a door and is open.
  • the bottom of the container 60 is inclined so as to be positioned downward as the distance from the first side surface 123 increases. Therefore, the banknotes in the container 60 are accumulated at a position where they enter from the first side surface 123 to the inside. Thereby, it can prevent that the banknote carried in in the container 60 is discharged
  • the two stoppers 64, 64 are provided at the edge of the bottom of the container 60 on the first side surface 123 side.
  • the stopper 64 is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in parallel with the edge of the bottom portion on the first side surface 123 side, and is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) so as to be against the bottom of the container 60. Standing up.
  • These stoppers 64, 64 can also prevent the banknotes in the container 60 from being discharged from the reject outlet 63 on the first side surface 123 to the outside. Note that when the banknotes accumulated in the reject stacker 6 are extracted from the reject outlet 63, the banknotes can be extracted by depressing the stoppers 64 and 64 against the elastic force of the biasing spring.
  • the impeller 61 has a plurality of flexible wings, and has a role of knocking down the end of the banknote falling in the container 60 on the rear side in the transport direction. Even when banknotes are continuously carried into the container 60, it is possible to prevent subsequent banknotes from entering the rear end of the previous banknote and stack the banknotes one by one in order. .
  • the integrated sensor 62 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25, and detects the banknote in the container 60 when light is blocked.
  • the integrated sensor 62 is arranged so that light is blocked by the banknotes in the container 60.
  • the bundling unit 9 includes a tape supply unit 91 that supplies the tape T, a tape ring creation unit 92 that creates the tape ring L using the tape T, A temporary gripping portion 93 (see FIGS.
  • a clamp portion 94 for pressing the bill B in the stacking direction when the bill B is bound with the tape T
  • a heater 95 that joins the tapes T with the tape T wrapped around the banknote B
  • a cutter 96 that cuts the tape T at a position where the tape T is not wrapped around the banknote B
  • a printing unit 97 that prints on the tape T
  • a stamping portion 98 for stamping.
  • the tape supply unit 91 includes a tape reel 911 around which the tape T is wound and a tape transport unit 912 that transports the tape T drawn from the tape reel 911.
  • the tape transport unit 912 transports the tape T along a predetermined transport path.
  • the tape transport unit 912 has a guide (not shown) and a plurality of roller pairs.
  • the tape ring creating unit 92 creates a tape ring L with the tape T, and after the accumulated banknotes B are arranged in the tape ring L, the tape T is pulled back and the tape T is wound around the banknotes B.
  • the tape ring creating unit 92 includes a feed roller pair 920 that feeds and retracts the tape T, a tape gripping unit 921 that grips the leading end of the tape T, and the tape ring L when the tape T is created with the tape T. It has a guide portion 925 that defines the shape, a first tape sensor 9210 that detects the tip of the tape T, and a second tape sensor 9211 that detects that the large tape ring L2 has been created.
  • the tape ring creating unit 92 creates the small tape ring L1 with the tape T by the tape gripping unit 921, and then feeds the tape T by the feed roller pair 920 to enlarge the small tape ring L1 to create the large tape ring L2. To do. At that time, the guide portion 925 guides the tape T to define the shape of the large tape ring L2, and the second tape sensor 9211 detects the formation of the large tape ring L2.
  • the feed roller pair 920 is driven by a stepping motor to feed the tape T when the tape ring L is created. On the other hand, after the bill B is placed in the tape ring L, the tape T is wound around the bill B. Pull back.
  • the feed roller pair 920 is located at the downstream end of the tape transport unit 912 and also constitutes a part of the tape transport unit 912.
  • the delivery roller pair 920 is an example of a delivery unit.
  • the roller pair of the tape transport unit 912 is also driven by a motor of the feed roller pair 920 via a belt, a gear, and the like.
  • the first tape sensor 9210 is provided in the transport path of the tape T and is provided between the feed roller pair 920 and the tape grip portion 921.
  • the first tape sensor 9210 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25.
  • the first tape sensor 9210 detects the tape T when light is blocked. For example, the leading end of the tape T can be detected when the pair of delivery rollers 920 pulls back the tape T and the first tape sensor 9210 is in a state where light is received from a state where the light is blocked.
  • the tape gripping portion 921 is disposed at a position where the tape T fed from the feed roller pair 920 can be received.
  • the tape gripping portion 921 is configured to be able to grip the tape T and to be rotatable while gripping the tape T.
  • the tape gripping portion 921 creates a tape loop L by rotating in a state where the tip end portion of the tape T fed from the feed roller pair 920 is gripped.
  • FIG. 4 shows a perspective view of the tape gripping portion 921.
  • 4A shows a closed state of the tape gripping portion 921
  • FIG. 4B shows an open state of the tape gripping portion 921.
  • the tape gripping portion 921 has a base portion 922, a movable portion 923, and a rotating shaft 924.
  • the base portion 922 includes a flat base plate 922a and a base block 922b provided integrally with the base plate 922a.
  • the base plate 922a is formed with first and second concave grooves 922c and 922d extending in parallel with each other.
  • the first and second concave grooves 922c and 922d extend in the tape width direction.
  • a rotation shaft 924 is rotatably inserted into the base block 922b.
  • the rotating shaft 924 extends in the tape width direction and is driven to rotate by a motor.
  • the movable portion 923 is disposed so as to face the base plate 922 a and is fixed to the distal end of the rotation shaft 924 so as not to rotate with respect to the rotation shaft 924.
  • the movable part 923 is rotationally driven via a rotary shaft 924.
  • the movable portion 923 is provided with an attachment portion 923a attached to the distal end of the rotation shaft 924, and a pressing portion provided at a position eccentric from the rotation shaft 924 in the attachment portion 923a and extending in parallel with the rotation shaft 924 (that is, in the tape width direction).
  • 923b and first and second guide portions 923c and 923d provided at both ends of the presser portion 923b.
  • a guide groove 923e is formed between the first guide portion 923c and the mounting plate 923a.
  • the movable portion 923 When the rotating shaft 924 rotates to one side around the axis, the movable portion 923 is in a state of overlapping with the base plate 922a as shown in FIG. This state is referred to as a closed state of the tape grip portion 921.
  • the movable portion 923 when the rotary shaft 924 rotates to the other side around the axis, the movable portion 923 is in a state where a gap is formed between the movable portion 923 and the base plate 922a as shown in FIG. This state is referred to as an open state of the tape gripping portion 921.
  • the tape gripping portion 921 When the tape gripping portion 921 is in the open state, the tape T can be inserted between the movable portion 923 and the base plate 922a.
  • the movable portion 923 is configured to be lockable with respect to the base portion 922 in a state where the movable portion 923 overlaps with the base plate 922a, that is, in a closed state.
  • the movable portion 923 is locked, the movable portion 923 and the base portion 922 cannot be rotated relative to each other, and the state where the movable portion 923 and the base plate 922a overlap with each other is maintained.
  • the rotary shaft 924 rotates with the movable portion 923 locked, the tape gripping portion 921 rotates around the rotary shaft 924 with the tape T sandwiched between the base plate 922a and the movable portion 923.
  • the pressing portion 923b of the movable portion 923 overlaps with a portion of the base plate 922a adjacent to the second concave groove 922d. That is, the second concave groove 922d is exposed at a position adjacent to the pressing portion 923b.
  • the first and second guide portions 923c and 923d extend in a direction orthogonal to the base plate 922a.
  • the guide groove 923e extends in a direction orthogonal to the base plate 922a.
  • the guide portion 925 defines the shape of the large tape ring L2 by making contact with the outer peripheral surface of the large tape ring L2 when creating the large tape ring L2.
  • the guide part 925 defines the large tape ring L2 in a substantially rectangular shape, specifically, a rectangular shape with curved corners.
  • FIG. 5 shows a perspective view of the tape loop creating unit 92.
  • the guide portion 925 includes a lower guide portion 926 that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the large tape ring L2 from the lower side of the large tape ring L2, a first side guide portion 927 that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the large tape ring L2 from the horizontal direction, and It has a second side guide portion 928 and four first to fourth corner guide portions 929a to 929d corresponding to the four corner portions of the rectangle.
  • FIG. 6 shows a perspective view of the lower part of the tape ring creating section 92 as viewed from obliquely above.
  • the lower guide portion 926 has a pair of side walls 926a, 926a and a bottom wall 926b that regulate the position of the tape T in the width direction, and is formed in a groove shape.
  • the width of the bottom wall 926b is wider than the tape width.
  • the pair of side walls 926a and 926a are inclined so that the groove width increases from the bottom wall 926b toward the opening end (that is, upward).
  • a plurality of rollers 926c, 926c,... For improving the slidability of the tape T are provided on the bottom wall 926b.
  • the bottom wall 926b is provided with a through hole 926d through which a stamp 981 of a stamping portion 98 described later passes.
  • first corner guide part 929a and 2nd corner guide part 929b are provided in the longitudinal direction both ends of bottom wall 926b.
  • the first corner guide portion 929a bends the tape T located at the corner formed by the lower guide portion 926 and the first side guide portion 927.
  • the second corner guide part 929b bends the tape T located at the corner formed by the lower guide part 926 and the second side guide part 928 (not shown in FIG. 6).
  • Each of the first corner guide portion 929a and the second corner guide portion 929b is composed of two plates. Each of the two plates has an edge that curves in a concave shape, and is erected on the bottom wall 926b so as to face each other.
  • the lower guide portion 926 is provided with a third tape sensor 926e that detects the tape T dropped on the lower guide portion 926.
  • the third tape sensor 926e has the same configuration as that of the banknote sensor 25, and detects the tape T by blocking the light emitted from the transmission unit and reaching the reception unit.
  • Each of the transmission unit and the reception unit of the third tape sensor 926e is provided at both longitudinal ends of the bottom wall 926b.
  • the transmitter emits light along the longitudinal direction of the bottom wall 926b above the bottom wall 926b.
  • the third tape sensor 926e is an example of a drop detection sensor.
  • the lower guide portion 926 is provided with a moving mechanism, and is configured to be movable up and down by the moving mechanism.
  • This moving mechanism is common to the moving mechanism of lower clamp parts 943 and 944 described later.
  • the moving mechanism includes a motor, a disk that is rotationally driven by the motor, a support part that supports the lower guide part 926 to be movable up and down, and a link that connects the disk and the lower guide part 926.
  • a cam groove is formed in the disk. The link transmits the rotation of the disk to the lower guide portion 926 according to the shape of the cam groove. When the disk is driven to rotate, the lower guide portion 926 moves up and down according to the shape of the cam groove.
  • the first side guide portion 927 extends in the vertical direction at the end of the lower guide portion 926 on the binding stacker 4 side in the longitudinal direction.
  • the 1st side guide part 927 has the side wall 927a and the bottom wall 927b, and is formed in groove shape.
  • the side wall 927a regulates the position of the tape T in the width direction.
  • the width of the bottom wall 927b is wider than the tape width.
  • Two slits through which the first corner guide portion 929a passes are formed in the bottom wall 927b.
  • 2nd side guide part 928 is extended in the up-down direction in the edge part by the side of the projection part 11 of the longitudinal direction of the lower guide part 926.
  • the second side guide portion 928 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and a portion corresponding to the side wall 927a of the first side guide portion 927 is not provided.
  • the second side guide portion 928 is supported by the support portion so as to be vertically movable, and is connected to the lower guide portion 926 via a link.
  • the second side guide portion 928 rises in conjunction with the rise of the lower guide portion 926 and descends in conjunction with the fall of the lower guide portion 926.
  • the amount of movement of the second side guide portion 928 is amplified by the link.
  • the second side guide portion 928 is configured to retract upward so as not to hinder the conveyance of the bundled banknote B when the bundled banknote B is conveyed.
  • a third corner guide portion 929c and a fourth corner guide portion 929d are provided above the first corner guide portion 929a and the second corner guide portion 929b and at substantially the same height as the tape grip portion 921. Yes.
  • the third corner guide part 929c is provided adjacent to the first side guide part 927.
  • the third corner guide portion 929c has two plates. The two plates have end edges that curve in a concave shape, and stand on the bottom wall 927b so as to face each other.
  • the fourth corner guide portion 929d is provided adjacent to the second side guide portion 928.
  • the fourth corner guide portion 929d is formed of a block having a curved surface that is curved in a concave shape.
  • corner guide portions 929 when the first to fourth corner guide portions 929a to 929d are not particularly distinguished, they may be simply referred to as corner guide portions 929.
  • the second tape sensor 9211 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25 and detects the tape T when light is blocked.
  • the receiving part of the second tape sensor 9211 is attached to the fourth corner guide part 929d as shown in FIG.
  • the transmission unit of the second tape sensor 9211 is disposed at a position where light from the transmission unit is blocked by the tape T guided by the fourth corner guide unit 929d.
  • the second tape sensor 9211 is configured such that the fourth corner guide portion 929d guides the tape T when the transmitting portion transmits light and the receiving portion does not receive light. Detects that it has reached a predetermined size.
  • the second tape sensor 9211 is an example of a tape ring detection sensor.
  • the temporary gripping part 93 temporarily grips the bill B transported into the tape loop L by the second transporting part 8.
  • the temporary holding portion 93 is provided on the opposite side to the second conveying portion 8 with respect to the tape loop L in the second horizontal direction, that is, the tape width direction.
  • the temporary gripping portion 93 grips a portion of the banknote B on the side opposite to the second transport portion 8 with respect to the tape loop L.
  • the temporary gripping portion 93 includes an upper gripping portion 931, a lower gripping portion 932, and a vertical movement mechanism that moves the upper gripping portion 931 and the lower gripping portion 932 in the vertical direction.
  • the temporary gripping portion 93 grips the bill B with the upper gripping portion 931 and the lower gripping portion 932.
  • FIG. 7 shows a perspective view of the upper part of the tape ring creating section 92 as seen obliquely from below.
  • the upper grip portion 931 includes an upper base plate 933, an upper movable plate 934, and first and second contact portions 931a and 931b provided on the upper movable plate 934.
  • the first and second contact portions 931 a and 931 b are arranged in the short direction of the bill B.
  • the 1st contact part 931a and the 2nd contact part 931b are located in the same height.
  • a base plate 922a of the tape gripping portion 921 is disposed between the first contact portion 931a and the second contact portion 931b.
  • the upper movable plate 934 is supported by the upper base plate 933 so as to be movable in the width direction of the tape T.
  • the lower grip 932 includes a lower base plate 935, a lower movable plate 936, and first and second contact portions 932 a and 932 b provided on the lower movable plate 936.
  • the first and second contact portions 932a and 932b are arranged in the short direction of the bill B.
  • the first contact portion 932a and the second contact portion 932b are located at the same height.
  • the first and second contact portions 932a and 932b are opposed to the first and second contact portions 931a and 931b of the upper grip portion 931, respectively.
  • the lower movable plate 936 is supported by the lower base plate 935 so as to be movable in the width direction of the tape T.
  • the vertical movement mechanism includes a motor, a disk that is rotationally driven by the motor, a support unit that supports the upper base plate 933 and the lower base plate 935 so as to be movable up and down, and a link that connects the disk, the upper base plate 933, and the lower base plate 935, respectively. And have.
  • a cam groove is formed in the disk.
  • the link transmits the rotation of the disk to each of the upper base plate 933 and the lower base plate 935 according to the shape of the cam groove.
  • the upper base plate 933 and the lower base plate 935 move up and down according to the shape of the cam groove.
  • the upper grip portion 931 and the lower grip portion 932 are separated from each other or close to each other.
  • the cam groove for the upper base plate 933 and the cam groove for the lower base plate 935 have different shapes. For this reason, the upper gripping portion 931 and the lower gripping portion 932 do not move up and down by the same amount, but move up and down in different modes.
  • the upper movable plate 934 and the lower movable plate 936 are configured to move in the second horizontal direction in conjunction with the movement of the second transport unit 8 when the bill is transported into the large tape ring L2. ing.
  • the upper movable plate 934 is supported not only by the upper base plate 933 but also by a shaft extending vertically.
  • the lower movable plate 936 is supported not only by the lower base plate 935 but also by a shaft extending vertically. Since these shafts extend in the vertical direction, when the upper grip portion 931 and the lower grip portion 932 move up and down, the upper movable plate 934 and the lower movable plate 936 move up and down along the shaft. Does not hinder the vertical movement of the upper grip portion 931 and the lower grip portion 932.
  • These two shafts are integrally formed by a frame. The frame and the shaft are configured to be movable in the second horizontal direction by a moving mechanism.
  • the frame and the shaft are moved in the second horizontal direction by the moving mechanism in conjunction with the movement of the second conveying unit 8 when the bill is conveyed into the large tape ring L2.
  • the moving mechanism moves the frame in the second horizontal direction in conjunction with the movement of the second transport unit 8.
  • the upper movable plate 934 and the lower movable plate 936 supported by the shaft of the frame also move in the second horizontal direction.
  • first and second contact portions 931a and 931b of the upper grip portion 931 and the first and second contact portions 932a and 932b of the lower grip portion 932 are within the large tape ring L2 of the bill by the second transport portion 8.
  • the position in the second horizontal direction is changed according to the amount of insertion.
  • the clamp part 94 presses the banknote B in the stacking direction when binding the banknote B with the tape T.
  • the clamp portion 94 presses a portion in the vicinity of the portion to be bound bound by the tape T in the bill B.
  • the clamp portion 94 is provided below the bill B and a pair of upper clamp portions 941, 942 provided above the bill B conveyed into the tape loop L. It has a pair of lower clamp parts 943, 944, and a moving mechanism for moving one upper clamp part 942 and lower clamp parts 943, 944 up and down.
  • the upper clamp portions 941 and 942 are provided on both sides of the tape T in the tape width direction.
  • the upper clamp part 941 far from the second transport part 8 is fixed and cannot move up and down.
  • the upper clamp part 942 closer to the second transport part 8 is configured to be movable up and down.
  • the former is referred to as a fixed upper clamp portion 941 and the latter is referred to as a movable upper clamp portion 942.
  • the fixed upper clamp portion 941 has first and second contact portions 941a and 941b.
  • the first and second contact portions 941 a and 941 b are arranged in the short direction of the bill B.
  • the first contact portion 941a and the second contact portion 941b are located at the same height.
  • a base plate 922a of the tape gripping portion 921 is disposed between the first contact portion 941a and the second contact portion 941b.
  • the base plate 922a is located at a position lower than the first and second contact portions 941a and 941b.
  • the movable upper clamp portion 942 has first to third contact portions 942a to 942c.
  • the first to third contact portions 942a to 942c are arranged in the short direction of the bill B.
  • the third contact portion 942c is located between the first contact portion 942a and the second contact portion 942b in the lateral direction.
  • the first contact portion 942a and the second contact portion 942b are located at the same height.
  • the third contact portion 942c is located at a position lower than the first contact portion 942a and the second contact portion 942b.
  • the movable upper clamp portion 942 includes a clamp position where the first contact portion 942a and the second contact portion 942b are the same height as the first contact portion 941a and the second contact portion 941b of the fixed upper clamp portion 941.
  • the third contact portion 942c moves up and down between a retracted position that is higher than the first contact portion 941a and the second contact portion 941b of the fixed upper clamp portion 941.
  • the third contact portion 942c is located at substantially the same height as the base plate 922a of the tape grip portion 921.
  • the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are provided on both sides of the tape T in the tape width direction.
  • the lower clamp part 943 far from the second transport part 8 and the lower clamp part 944 closer to the second transport part 8 have the same configuration.
  • the lower clamp portion 943 includes first and second contact portions 943a and 943b.
  • the first and second contact portions 943 a and 943 b are arranged in the short direction of the bill B.
  • the first contact portion 943a and the second contact portion 943b are located at the same height.
  • the first and second contact portions 943a and 943b are opposed to the first and second contact portions 941a and 941b of the fixed upper clamp portion 941, respectively.
  • the lower clamp portion 944 has first and second contact portions 944a and 944b.
  • the first and second contact portions 944 a and 944 b are arranged in the short direction of the banknote B.
  • the first contact portion 944a and the second contact portion 944b are located at the same height, and the first contact portion 943a and the second contact portion 943b of the lower clamp portion 943 are located at the same height. Yes.
  • the first and second contact portions 944a and 944b oppose the first and second contact portions 942a and 942b of the movable upper clamp portion 942, respectively.
  • the vertical movement mechanism includes a motor, a disk that is rotationally driven by the motor, a support part that supports the movable upper clamp part 942 and the lower clamp parts 943 and 944 to be movable up and down, a disk, a movable upper clamp part 942, and a lower part. It has a link which connects clamp parts 943 and 944, respectively.
  • a cam groove is formed in the disk. The link transmits the rotation of the disk to each of the movable upper clamp portion 942 and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 according to the shape of the cam groove.
  • the movable upper clamp portion 942 and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 move up and down according to the shape of the cam groove when the disk is driven to rotate.
  • the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 approach or separate from the upper clamp portions 941 and 942, and the movable upper clamp 942 moves up and down between the clamp position and the retracted position.
  • the cam groove for the movable upper clamp portion 942 and the cam groove for the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are different in shape. Therefore, the movable upper clamp portion 942 and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 move up and down in different manners instead of moving up and down by the same amount.
  • the motor is the same as the motor of the moving mechanism of the temporary holding part 93.
  • the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are formed integrally with the lower guide portion 926 of the guide portion 925. That is, the lower clamp parts 943, 944 and the lower guide part 926 move up and down integrally. That is, the moving mechanism that moves the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 up and down is the same as the moving mechanism of the lower guide portion 926.
  • the heater 95 joins the tapes T with the tape T wound around the bill B.
  • the heater 95 thermally welds the tapes T to each other.
  • the heater 95 is an example of a joint.
  • the cutter 96 cuts a portion where the tape T is not wrapped around the bill B, that is, a portion of the tape T where the bill B is bound and left over.
  • the tip of the cutter 96 is provided with a sawtooth cutting blade.
  • the cutter 96 has guide pieces 96 a that protrude outward at both side edges.
  • the cutter 96 is an example of a cutting part.
  • the heater 95 and the cutter 96 are unitized and are arranged on the side opposite to the stamped portion 98 with respect to the bill B arranged in the tape ring L, specifically, the bill B is stacked. It is arrange
  • the heater 95 joins the tape T on the base plate 922a of the tape grip portion 921.
  • the cutter 96 cuts the tape T on the base plate 922a of the tape grip portion 921.
  • the printing unit 97 is provided in the tape transport unit 912 as shown in FIG.
  • the printing unit 97 performs printing on the tape T conveyed by the tape conveying unit 912.
  • the printing unit 97 prints information (for example, denomination, date and time, serial number, etc.) related to the banknotes B to be bound on the tape T, for example.
  • the printing position of the printing part 97 is shifted in the tape width direction with respect to the part to be imprinted by the imprinting part 98 so that the printing does not overlap with the imprinting by the imprinting part 98.
  • the stamp portion 98 compresses the bill B with the clamp portion 94 and stamps the tape T with the tape T wound around the bill B.
  • the stamping part 98 stamps, for example, a mark related to the banknotes B to be bound (for example, a financial institution mark, a mark indicating the type of banknotes such as a correct note or a non-performing bill) on the tape T.
  • a mark related to the banknotes B to be bound for example, a financial institution mark, a mark indicating the type of banknotes such as a correct note or a non-performing bill
  • the stamping portion 98 is provided on the opposite side of the heater 95 and the cutter 96 with respect to the bill B arranged in the tape ring L, specifically, in the stacking direction of the bill B, It is arranged on the side opposite to the cutter 96.
  • the stamp unit 98 includes a stamp 981 and a moving mechanism 982 that moves the stamp 981 in the vertical direction.
  • the stamp portion 98 is provided integrally with the lower guide portion 926, and moves in the vertical direction integrally with the lower guide portion 926 when the lower guide portion 926 moves in the vertical direction.
  • the stamp 981 is disposed between the pair of side walls 926a and 926a of the lower guide portion 926 in the short direction of the lower guide portion 926, that is, in the width direction of the tape T.
  • the stamp 981 is disposed below the through hole 926d in the bottom wall 926b of the lower guide portion 926, and does not protrude upward from the bottom wall 926b.
  • the stamp 981 is moved upward by the moving mechanism 982
  • the stamp 981 passes through the through hole 926d, protrudes upward from the bottom wall 926b, and is stamped on the tape T.
  • FIG. 8 the block diagram which shows schematic structure of the banknote processing apparatus 100 is shown.
  • the banknote handling apparatus 100 includes a control unit 120 based on a known microcomputer, for example.
  • the control unit 120 includes the hopper unit 2, the identification unit 3, the binding stacker 4, the non-binding stacker 5, the reject stacker 6, the first transport unit 7, the second transport unit 8, the binding unit 9, and the third transport unit 10.
  • the touch panel 17 is connected to be able to transmit and receive signals.
  • the control unit 120 includes the banknote sensor 25, the first banknote sensor 45, the second banknote sensor 46, the integration sensor 52, the integration sensor 62, the passage sensor 74, the first tape sensor 9210, the second tape sensor 9211, and the third.
  • a tape sensor 926e is connected and these detection signals are input.
  • the control unit 120 generates a control signal based on an input signal from the touch panel 17 and detection signals from various sensors, and outputs the control signal to the hopper unit 2 and the like.
  • the hopper unit 2 and the like operate according to the control signal. For example, taking the bundling stacker 4 as an example, the front wall 40a, the stage 41, and the impeller 42 of the container 40 are controlled by the controller 120.
  • the deposit process of the banknote handling apparatus 100 will be described.
  • the banknotes in a loose state are classified and accumulated in a predetermined stacker, and further, the predetermined banknotes are bound.
  • a predetermined type of banknotes to be bound are stacked alternately on the first and second binding stackers 4A and 4B by a predetermined number, and the predetermined number of stacked banknotes are sequentially bound by the binding unit 9. Processing will be described.
  • the banknote handling apparatus 100 is on the teller counter, and is installed slightly on the left side (right side of the customer) of the operator when the operator faces the customer across the teller counter. At this time, the banknote handling apparatus 100 is installed such that the first side surface 123 of the housing 12 faces the customer. In this state, the second side surface 124 of the housing 12 faces the operator. However, since the banknote handling apparatus 100 is located slightly on the left side of the operator, the customer can also visually recognize the second side surface 124.
  • an operator receives a bill in a rose state to be deposited from a customer, and places the bill on the hopper unit 2. At this time, even if a plurality of types of banknotes are mixed in the banknotes in a rose state, they are placed on the hopper unit 2 without being classified. An operator adjusts the guide part 22 according to the dimension of a banknote. Subsequently, the operator operates the touch panel 17 to start taking in banknotes. Note that when the bill sensor 25 detects the placement of the bill on the hopper unit 2, the bill processing apparatus 100 may automatically start taking in the bill.
  • the banknotes placed on the hopper unit 2 are taken into the housing 12 from the take-in port 24 one by one when the take-in roller 23 is operated.
  • the taken banknote is transported by the first transport unit 7 and passes through the identification unit 3.
  • the identification unit 3 acquires the banknote type of the banknote that passes through and notifies the control unit 120 of the banknote type.
  • Control part 120 determines the conveyance destination corresponding to a banknote according to the kind of banknote. Specifically, when the banknote is a banknote of a predetermined denomination to be bound and is a correct banknote, the control unit 120 sets the transport destination as the binding stacker 4 (any one of 4A and 4B). When the banknote is a banknote of a predetermined denomination and is a banknote banknote, the control unit 120 sets the transport destination as the first non-binding stacker 5A. When the banknote is a banknote of a denomination other than the predetermined denomination, the control unit 120 sets the transport destination as the second non-binding stacker 5B. When the banknote is a reject banknote, the control unit 120 sets the transport destination as the reject stacker 6.
  • Control part 120 controls the 1st conveyance part 7 so that a bill may be conveyed to the stacker used as a conveyance place. Specifically, the control unit 120 controls the sorting mechanism 73 corresponding to the branch path 72 connected to the stacker as the transport destination so that the bill is guided from the main transport path 71 to the branch path 72. The control unit 120 switches the sorting mechanism 73 when the passage sensor 74 immediately before the branch path 72 detects a bill. Furthermore, the control unit 120 controls the impeller 42, the impeller 51, or the impeller 61 of the stacker serving as a transport destination, and carries bills into the stacker.
  • the bills conveyed to the bundling stacker 4 are conveyed to one of the two bundling stackers 4.
  • a predetermined number for example, 100
  • the subsequent banknotes are conveyed to the other binding stacker 4.
  • the banknote is first conveyed to the first binding stacker 4A.
  • the bills are stacked one by one by the rotation of the impeller 42.
  • the stage 41 is lowered by a predetermined amount, and the second banknote sensor 46 is not detecting the banknote.
  • the stage 41 is lowered again by a predetermined amount.
  • the control unit 120 controls the second transport unit 8 to grip the banknotes in the first binding stacker 4A by the gripping unit 81, and to remove the banknotes. It is conveyed to the binding unit 9. Thereafter, the control unit 120 controls the binding unit 9 to bind the banknotes with the tape T.
  • the subsequent banknotes are stacked on the second binding stacker 4B. Thereafter, when the banknotes stacked on the second binding stacker 4B reach the binding number, the subsequent banknotes are again stacked on the first binding stacker 4A. By this time, since the banknotes in the first binding stacker 4A have been unloaded, the first binding stacker 4A is empty. Thus, by providing the two binding stackers 4, the binding process can be performed while the banknotes are continuously collected.
  • control unit 120 controls the third transport unit 10 to throw out the bundled banknotes from the outlet 111.
  • a banknote of a predetermined denomination and a banknote banknote is conveyed to the first non-binding stacker 5A.
  • the first non-binding stacker 5 ⁇ / b> A when bills are conveyed, the bills are stacked in the container 50 by the rotation of the impeller 51. In this way, banknotes of a predetermined denomination and banknotes are stacked on the first non-binding stacker 5A.
  • banknotes of denominations other than the predetermined denomination are conveyed to the second non-bundling stacker 5B and accumulated in the second non-bundling stacker 5B. Reject banknotes are also transported to the reject stacker 6 and accumulated in the reject stacker 6.
  • the rejected banknotes are taken in and identified again. That is, the operator removes the reject banknote from the reject stacker 6, places it on the hopper unit 2, and takes it in again. Since the reject banknote is a banknote that has not been identified as a normal banknote for some reason, it tries to capture and identify again. Nevertheless, the banknotes identified as reject banknotes are again accumulated in the reject stacker 6. The operator returns the accumulated banknotes to the customer.
  • the same-type bundling process is completed, and the counting and sorting of banknotes to be deposited passed from the customer are completed.
  • the touch panel 17 the counted amount is displayed.
  • the operator obtains the approval of the amount from the customer or confirms the coincidence between the amount and the amount described in the payment slip described by the customer, the operator confirms the amount of money with the touch panel 17.
  • the confirmed deposit amount is notified to a higher-level device (not shown), and the deposit process is completed.
  • the operator takes out the bundled banknotes thrown to the dispensing unit 11, the banknotes accumulated in the bundling stacker 4, and the banknotes accumulated in the non-bundled stacker 5, and takes a predetermined storage location. Store in.
  • a banknote in which a plurality of types of banknotes are mixed and in a loose state is a regular banknote of a predetermined denomination, a banknote banknote of a predetermined denomination, and a banknote of a denomination other than the predetermined denomination,
  • the bills are classified as reject banknotes, and the correct banknotes of a predetermined denomination are in a state of being bound for each bound number.
  • FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of banknote compression processing in the binding stacker, where (A) shows a state immediately after completion of banknote accumulation, and (B) shows a state after completion of banknote compression.
  • illustration of the 1st banknote sensor 45 is abbreviate
  • the stage 41 is positioned relatively downward, and the top banknote among the banknotes B on the stage 41 is the top plate 44. Away from.
  • the stage 41 rises and compresses the accumulated bills B with the stage 41 and the top plate 44.
  • the control unit 120 raises the stage 41 to a position where the distance between the stage 41 and the top plate 44 is a predetermined value T1.
  • the banknote B on the stage 41 is compressed to the same thickness as the predetermined value T1.
  • the stage 41 is raised as described above. The bill B is not compressed.
  • the stage 41 and the top plate 44 are an example of a compression unit.
  • the second transport unit 8 transports the bills B from the binding stacker 4 to the binding unit 9.
  • FIG. 10 the figure of the state which the 2nd conveyance part 8 extracted the banknote B from the binding stacker 4 is shown.
  • FIG. 11 the figure of the state which the 2nd conveyance part 8 conveyed the banknote B to the side of the tape ring L is shown.
  • the second transport unit 8 moves to the binding stacker 4 where the stacking of the bills B is completed, grips the bills B in the binding stacker 4, and binds as shown in FIG. Pull out from the stacker 4.
  • the accumulation of the bills B is completed in the first binding stacker 4A.
  • the stage 41 and the top plate 44 of the bundling stacker 4 are provided with a gap through which the gripping unit 81 can be inserted. Therefore, the gripping unit 81 can grip the banknote B that is sandwiched between the stage 41 and the top plate 44.
  • the gripping unit 81 sandwiches the banknote B compressed by the stage 41 and the top plate 44 from the stacking direction and further compresses it. That is, the thickness T2 of the bill B gripped by the gripping unit 81 is thinner than the thickness T1 of the bill B compressed by the stage 41 and the top plate 44.
  • the stage 41 descends after the gripping unit 81 holds the bill B.
  • the second transport unit 8 extracts the gripped banknote B from the first binding stacker 4A in the first horizontal direction.
  • the 2nd conveyance part 8 moves the banknote B to a 1st horizontal direction to the predetermined
  • the second transport unit 8 moves the banknote B up and down to a predetermined second position.
  • This 2nd position is a position which conveys bill B into large tape ring L2.
  • the bill B In the second position, when viewed in the longitudinal direction of the bill B, the bill B is located near the center of the large tape ring L2.
  • FIG. 12 shows a state where the tape gripping portion 921 grips the leading end portion of the tape T.
  • FIG. 13 shows a state in which the tape gripping portion 921 starts to rotate while gripping the leading end portion of the tape T.
  • FIG. 14 shows a state where the tape gripping portion 921 has created the small tape ring L1.
  • FIG. 15 shows a state in which the creation of the large tape ring L2 has been completed.
  • the delivery roller pair 920 pulls back the tape T until the first tape sensor 9210 detects the tip of the tape T.
  • the feed roller pair 920 feeds the tape T.
  • the tape gripping portion 921 stands by in a state where a gap is left between the movable portion 923 and the base plate 922a and the tape T sent from the feed roller pair 920 enters the gap.
  • the rotary shaft 924 is driven to rotate, and the leading end of the tape T is moved between the movable portion 923 and the base plate 922a as shown in FIG. Hold it.
  • the movable portion 923 is locked in a state where the tip portion of the tape T is held together with the base plate 922a.
  • the tip of the tape T is held by the tape holding portion 921 in a substantially horizontal state.
  • the printing unit 97 prints on the tape T in parallel with the feeding by the feeding roller pair 920.
  • the tape gripping portion 921 starts to rotate while gripping the tip end portion of the tape T.
  • the delivery of the tape T by the delivery roller pair 920 continues.
  • the tape gripping portion 921 rotates so as to move the tip end of the tape T downward, that is, counterclockwise in FIG.
  • tape loop L1 the tape loop L created by the tape gripping portion 921 rotating substantially once.
  • the tip of the tape T gripped by the tape gripping portion 921 is positioned above the small tape ring L1, and the small tape ring L1 is created below the tape gripping portion 921.
  • the small tape ring L1 is formed at a position lower than the feed roller pair 920.
  • the rotation of the tape gripping portion 921 stops, while the feeding of the tape T by the feeding roller pair 920 is continued.
  • the small tape ring L1 gradually increases.
  • the tip end portion of the tape T gripped by the tape gripping portion 921 is positioned above the small tape ring L1, and the tape T from the feed roller pair 920 is supplied from the top of the small tape ring L1, so that the small tape The ring L1 swells downward. Since the guide portion 925 is disposed below the tape grip portion 921, the tape ring L eventually comes into contact with the guide portion 925, and the shape of the tape ring L is defined by the guide portion 925.
  • a tape ring L formed in a substantially rectangular shape is created by the guide portion 925 as shown in FIG.
  • This tape ring L is referred to as “large tape ring L2”.
  • the large tape ring L2 is in contact with the lower guide portion 926, the first side guide portion 927, and the second side guide portion 928, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape.
  • the large tape ring L2 is in contact with the first to fourth corner guide portions 929a to 929d, thereby forming a rectangular shape with curved corner portions.
  • the control unit 120 creates the large tape ring L2 when the second tape sensor 9211 detects the tape T when the amount of the tape T fed from the pair of feed rollers 920 reaches the predetermined amount. Is detected.
  • the control unit 120 obtains the feed amount of the tape T based on the drive amount of the stepping motor of the feed roller pair 920 after the first tape sensor 9210 detects the leading end of the tape T.
  • the second tape sensor 9211 does not detect the tape T even though the amount of the tape T fed from the pair of feed rollers 920 has reached the predetermined amount, a part of the tape ring L bends inward,
  • the tape ring L may not have an appropriate shape (that is, the large tape ring L2) along the guide portion 925.
  • the control unit 120 moves the tape T by a predetermined pullback amount. After pulling back, the tape T is fed again until the total delivery amount reaches the predetermined amount. Then, the control unit 120 confirms whether or not the second tape sensor 9211 detects the tape T. When the second tape sensor 9211 does not detect the tape T, the control unit 120 repeats the above-described pull-back and feed-out of the tape T and confirmation of the tape detection.
  • the second tape sensor 9211 is configured to detect the tape T guided by the fourth corner guide portion 929d. That is, the second tape sensor 9211 detects the presence or absence of the tape T at a predetermined position above the banknote B when the banknote B is conveyed into the large tape loop L2. If a part of the tape ring L bends inward, there is a high possibility that the upper part of the tape ring L bends due to its own weight. That is, by arranging the second tape sensor 9211 at the aforementioned position, it is possible to accurately detect the bending of the tape ring L.
  • the creation of the large tape loop L2 is performed in parallel with the process in which the second transport unit 8 transports the banknote B from the binding stacker 4 to the binding unit 9 as shown in FIGS. Normally (that is, when the large tape loop L2 is created by feeding the tape T once), the creation of the large tape loop L2 is completed when the bill B is conveyed to the second position.
  • FIG. 16 shows an operation explanatory diagram of each part until the bill B is conveyed to the large tape ring L2 and gripped by the temporary gripping portion 93 when viewed in the thickness direction of the bill B.
  • gripped by the temporary holding part 93 when it looks in the transversal direction of the banknote B is shown.
  • FIG. 18 is an operation explanatory diagram of each part until the gripping unit 81 picks up the banknote B and the tape T is wound around the banknote B when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote B.
  • FIG. 19 is an operation explanatory view of each part until the gripping unit 81 picks up the bill B and the tape T is wound around the bill B when viewed in the short direction of the bill B.
  • (A) is a state where the gripping unit 81 has picked up the banknote B
  • (B) is a state where the clamp portion 94 presses the banknote B
  • (C) is In this state, the tape T is wound.
  • FIG. 20 the state of the guide part 925 when the clamp part 94 presses the banknote B is shown.
  • 16 and 18 the upper grip 931, the fixed upper clamp 941 and the movable upper clamp 942 are not shown.
  • 16 and 18, the portions of the lower grip portion 932 and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 that are in contact with the bill B are indicated by hatching.
  • the second transport unit 8 transports the banknote B to the second position as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 (see FIGS. 16 (A) and 17 (A)), and then transfers the banknote B to the second position. 2 Move in the horizontal direction and enter into the large tape loop L2.
  • the gripping unit 81 of the second transport unit 8 moves the bill B to a predetermined third position in the second horizontal direction.
  • This third position is a position where the tape T coincides with the approximate center of the bill B in the longitudinal direction in the second horizontal direction.
  • the temporary gripping unit 93 also moves in the second horizontal direction. Specifically, the temporary holding unit 93 moves in the same direction as the second transport unit 8 in the second horizontal direction. The amount of movement at this time corresponds to the amount of movement of the second transport unit 8.
  • the temporary gripping portion 93 grips the bill B. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 16C and 17C, the upper grip 931 moves downward and the lower grip 932 moves upward, and the upper grip 931 and the lower grip 932 move to the large tape ring L2.
  • the banknote B is clamped from above and below in the approximate center in the height direction.
  • Temporary gripping portion 93 grips a portion of banknote B that is on the leading side when banknote B is advanced into large tape ring L2 and beyond large tape ring L2.
  • the gripping unit 81 of the second transport unit 8 releases the banknote B, in the second horizontal direction, in the direction opposite to that when the banknote B enters the large tape ring L2. Moving. Then, as shown in FIGS. 18 (A) and 19 (A), the gripping unit 81 grips a portion other than the portion to be bundled of the bills B (the portion around which the tape T is wound in the subsequent processing).
  • the clamp unit 94 presses the banknote B in the stacking direction, that is, in the vertical direction from both sides. Specifically, the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 of the clamp portion 94 move upward. Along with this, the gripping unit 81 and the temporary gripping portion 93 also move upward. At this time, the movable upper clamp portion 942 is located at the clamp position. Finally, as shown in FIGS. 18B and 19B, the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 press the bill B against the upper clamp portions 941 and 942. The upper clamp portions 941 and 942 and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 sandwich both sides of the bill B in the longitudinal direction of the bill B from above and below.
  • the banknote B is compressed from above and below by the upper clamp portions 941 and 942 and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944.
  • the lower clamp parts 943 and 944 that rise are stopped at positions where the upper clamp parts 941 and 942 and the lower clamp parts 943 and 944 compress the bill B to a predetermined thickness.
  • the lower guide portion 926 is also lower clamp portions 943 and 944. It moves upward with the rise. At this time, the feed roller pair 920 pulls back the tape T in conjunction with the ascent of the lower guide portion 926. As a result, as shown in FIG. 20, the tape ring L becomes smaller as the lower guide portion 926 rises. In addition, the second side guide portion 928 also rises in conjunction with the rise of the lower guide portion 926. Thereby, the space which can deform
  • the tape ring L is deformed so as to protrude from the guide portion 925.
  • the tape ring L may swell toward the space where the second side guide portion 928 was originally located. it can. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the tape T from being bent.
  • a third abutting portion 942c is provided between the first abutting portion 942a and the second abutting portion 942b of the movable upper clamp portion 942, and the third abutting portion 942c includes the first and second abutting portions 942c. It is located at a position lower than the two contact portions 942a and 942b. Further, the base plate 922a of the tape gripping portion 921 is disposed between the first contact portion 941a and the second contact portion 941b of the fixed upper clamp portion 941, and the base plate 922a has the first and second contact portions. It is located at a position lower than the contact portions 941a and 941b.
  • the first clamp portion 943a and the second contact portion 943b are disposed downward, and the first clamp portion 944a and the second contact portion 944b are disposed downward.
  • a recessed space is formed. Therefore, the bill B pressed by the clamp portion 94 has a shape in which a substantially central portion in the short direction is recessed downward.
  • the rising of the lower guide part 926 stops with the rising of the lower clamp parts 943, 944.
  • the return of the tape T by the feed roller pair 920 continues even after the lower guide portion 926 stops moving up.
  • the tape T is wound around the bill B as shown in FIGS.
  • the position of the tape T in the width direction is regulated by the side walls 926a and 926a of the lower guide portion 926 until just before being wound around the bill B. Therefore, the tape T is accurately wound around the planned binding portion of the banknotes.
  • FIG. 21 is an explanatory view of joining, cutting and stamping of the tape T, (A) shows a state where the first and second tape pressers are pressing the tape, and (B) is a case where the heater welds the tape. , Shows a state in which the cutter has cut the tape.
  • the heater 95 and the cutter 96 descend together. At this time, the first and second tape pressers 991 and 992 are also lowered together with the heater 95 and the cutter 96.
  • the first tape retainer 991 is fitted into the first concave groove 922c of the base plate 922a, and the tape T is sandwiched between the bottom wall of the first concave groove 922c.
  • the second tape presser 992 holds the tape T between the upper surface of the presser part 923 b of the movable part 923. At this time, welding by the heater 95 and cutting by the cutter 96 are not performed.
  • the heater 95 sandwiches the portion where the tip of the tape T overlaps the tape T with the base plate 922a of the tape gripping portion 921. Specifically, the heater 95 sandwiches the tape T at a portion between the first concave groove 922c and the second concave groove 922d in the base plate 922a. The heater 95 welds the overlapping tapes T by heat.
  • the cutter 96 cuts the tape T.
  • the cutter 96 cuts a portion of the tape T upstream of the welded portion by the heater 95, that is, a portion on the feed roller pair 920 side of the welded portion (hereinafter referred to as “surplus portion”).
  • the guide piece 96a is guided by the first and second guide portions 923c and 923d, and enters the second concave groove 922d. Specifically, one guide piece 96a is guided in a guide groove 923e between the first guide portion 923c and the mounting plate 923a, and the other guide piece 96a is guided by an end surface of the second guide portion 923d. .
  • the cutter 96 enters the second concave groove 922d, but stops at a position where it does not contact the bottom surface of the second concave groove 922d.
  • a tip portion of the tape T that is, a portion that binds the bills B is present below the surplus portion of the tape T.
  • the cutting blade of the cutter 96 is formed in a saw blade shape and has minute irregularities.
  • the convex portion of the cutting blade of the cutter 96 penetrates both the excess portion and the tip portion of the tape T, but the concave portion of the cutting blade is Only the excess part of the tape T is penetrated, and the tip part is not penetrated. Therefore, the excess portion of the tape T is completely cut by the cutter 96.
  • the tip portion of the tape T is not cut only by the convex portion of the cutting blade passing therethrough. A perforation with a plurality of small holes is formed at the tip of the tape T.
  • the tapes T wound around the banknote B are joined together, and the excess portion of the tape T is cut. Since the perforations are formed on the tape T that binds the bills B, the tape T can be easily cut at the perforations when the tape T is removed.
  • the cutter 96 interferes with the movable portion 923 even if there is a shape error or an assembly error of the cutter 96 itself. Can be prevented, and can appropriately enter the second concave groove 922d. Further, by providing the second concave groove 922d, contact between the cutter 96 and the base plate 922a can be prevented even if there is a shape error or assembly error of the cutter 96 itself. As a result, the durability of the cutter 96 can be improved.
  • the heater 95, the cutter 96, the first tape press 991, and the second tape press 992 are raised.
  • the first tape press 991 holds the tape T between the bottom wall of the first concave groove 922c for a while after the heater 95 is separated from the tape T.
  • the welded portion is not solidified, and if a load acts on the welded portion, there is a risk of causing poor welding.
  • the stamping portion 98 stamps the tape T in parallel with the welding with the heater 95 and the cutting with the cutter 96.
  • the stamp part 98 is raised together with the lower guide part 926 and is located immediately below the bill B when the tape T is welded and cut.
  • the stamping unit 98 raises the stamp 981.
  • the stamp 981 abuts on the tape T wound around the banknote B and stamps on the tape T.
  • the bill B is compressed by the clamp portion 94 as shown in FIGS. 18 (C) and 19 (C). That is, the bill B is fixed by the clamp portion 94. Moreover, since the 2nd conveyance part 8 conveys the banknote B to the fixed position, the positioning of the banknote B is also made
  • the stamp 981 is positioned with respect to the tape T. Specifically, the tape T passes through the through hole 926d of the bottom wall 926b of the lower guide portion 926 and is stamped on the tape T between the side walls 926a and 926a. Since the position of the tape T wound around the lower surface of the banknote B in the tape width direction is regulated by the side walls 926a and 926a, the tape T is placed at the point where the stamp 981 rises between the side walls 926a and 926a. positioned. Thus, the stamp 981 is stamped without protruding from the tape T.
  • the printing by the stamp 981 and the printing by the printing unit 97 do not overlap.
  • the heater 95 and the cutter 96 are arranged on one side in the stacking direction of the bills B, and the stamping part 98 is arranged on the other side in the stacking direction. Therefore, the arrangement space of the heater 95 and the cutter 96 and the stamping part 98 are arranged. Can be secured. That is, when the heater 95, the cutter 96, and the stamping portion 98 are arranged on one side in the stacking direction of the bills B, the space is limited, and thus the degree of freedom of arrangement is greatly limited. On the other hand, by arranging the heater 95 and the cutter 96 and the stamp part 98 separately on both sides in the stacking direction of the bills B, it is possible to secure the respective arrangement spaces and increase the degree of freedom of arrangement. Further, the stamping process can be performed on the other side in the stacking direction of the bills B while performing the joining process or / and the cutting process on one side in the stacking direction of the bills B.
  • FIG. 22 shows an operation explanatory diagram of each part until the bundled banknote B is thrown out to the throwing-out section 11 when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote B.
  • FIG. 23 the operation explanatory view of each part until the bundled banknote B is thrown into the throwing-out part 11 when it looks in the transversal direction of the banknote B is shown. 22 and 23, (A) is a state in which the bundled banknotes B are extracted in the second horizontal direction, and (B) is a state in which the third transport unit 10 grips the bundled banknotes B.
  • FIG. 22C shows a state in which the third transport unit 10 transports the bundled banknote B to the dispensing unit 11.
  • the upper gripping portion 931, the fixed upper clamp portion 941, and the movable upper clamp portion 942 are not shown.
  • the gripping unit 81 grips the bundled banknote B. Subsequently, the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are lowered, and the pressing by the clamp portion 94 is released. Note that the lower grip 932 of the temporary grip 93 is also slightly lowered. In addition, the movable upper clamp portion 942 rises. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 22 (A) and 23 (A), the second transport unit 8 is placed on the side opposite to the time when the bundled banknote B is transported in the second horizontal direction and the banknote is transported to the large tape loop L2. Transport only a fixed amount.
  • the tape gripping portion 921 grips the leading end portion of the tape T, and the base plate 922a of the tape gripping portion 921 is connected to the tape T as shown in FIG. It is in a state of entering between the bills B. Therefore, the second transport unit 8 moves the bundled bills B in the second horizontal direction until the base plate 922a comes out from between the tape T and the bills B.
  • the movable upper clamp portion 942 is located on the side where the bundled banknotes B are pulled out in the second horizontal direction from the tape T, and the third contact portion 942c of the movable upper clamp portion 942 is more than the tape T. Located in a low position. When the bundled banknote B is pulled out in the second horizontal direction in this state, the tape T interferes with the third contact portion 942c. Therefore, when the bundled banknote B is pulled out in the second horizontal direction, the movable upper clamp portion 942 is raised until the third contact portion 942c becomes higher than the tape T. Accordingly, the bundled banknotes B are pulled out in the second horizontal direction without the tape T contacting the third contact portion 942c. The 2nd conveyance part 8 will stop conveyance of the bundled banknote B, if the base board 922a moves the bundled banknote B by the amount which comes out from between the tape T and the banknote B.
  • the banknote B is supported by the holding
  • the lower guide portion 926 is positioned below the tape T and away from the tape T until the tape T is wound around the bill B and the tape T is joined and cut. Therefore, the tape T that has dropped downward is received by the lower guide portion 926.
  • the control part 120 is monitoring the presence or absence of the tape T on the lower guide part 926 by the 3rd tape sensor 926e at least, when the press of the banknote B by the clamp part 94 is cancelled
  • the holding unit 81 releases the holding of the bundled bills B.
  • the third transport unit 10 grips the bundled banknote B.
  • the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are lowered to a predetermined height position. This height position corresponds to the height of the dispensing unit 11.
  • the lower grip portion 932 is lowered to the same height as the lower clamp portions 943 and 944.
  • the second transport unit 8 moves the bundled banknote B to the height of the lower clamp units 943 and 944 and releases the grip of the grip unit 81.
  • the height of the lower arm portion 81b matches the height of the lower clamp portions 943, 944. That is, the bundled banknote B is placed on the lower arm part 81b and the lower clamp parts 943, 944.
  • the third transport unit 10 holds the bundled banknote B.
  • the third transport unit 10 transports the bundled banknote B toward the dispensing unit 11 in the first horizontal direction.
  • the lower arm portion 81 b and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 of the second transport unit 8 support the bundled bill B from below, and function as a guide when the bundled bill B is transported to the dispensing unit 11.
  • the third transport unit 10 gradually releases the grip of the bundled banknote B.
  • the bundled banknotes B are pushed out to the dispensing unit 11 by the third transport unit 10.
  • Bundled banknotes pushed out to the dispensing unit 11 are thrown out of the housing 12 through the dispensing unit 11.
  • the bill processing apparatus 100 configured as described above has a function of guiding an operator to a work location when performing operations such as maintenance and collection of accumulated bills.
  • maintenance include eliminating banknote jams and tape T jams, replacing consumable parts such as ink ribbons of the printing unit 97, and refilling the stamping unit 98 with ink.
  • banknote collection include collection of banknotes from the binding stacker 4, collection of banknotes from the non-binding stacker 5, collection of banknotes from the reject stacker 6, and the like.
  • the banknote processing apparatus 100 some parts of the housing
  • a lower cover 131 is provided in a substantially lower half of the second side surface 124 of the housing 12.
  • the lower cover 131 is provided with the second outlet 53 of the non-binding stacker 5 and the touch panel 17.
  • the lower cover 131 is configured to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction at a ridge portion between the third side surface 125 and the second side surface 124 facing the first side surface 123. By opening the lower cover 131, the first processing unit 126 is exposed.
  • a bundling portion cover 132 is provided on a substantially half of the upper surface 121 on the first side surface 123 side and a substantially upper half of the second side surface 124 and on the first side surface 123 side.
  • the binding unit cover 132 is configured to be slidable toward the first side surface 123.
  • the binding unit 9 is exposed by sliding the binding unit cover 132.
  • a reel cover 133 is provided on a portion of the upper surface 121 on the third side surface 125 side.
  • the reel cover 133 is configured to be rotatable around an axis extending in the horizontal direction at a ridge between the upper surface 121 and the third side surface 125. By opening the reel cover 133, the tape reel 911 is exposed.
  • the identification unit 3 is configured to be movable.
  • a part of the 1st conveyance part 7 is unitized, and it is comprised so that a movement is possible. By moving these units, the space behind them can be easily maintained.
  • These units are configured so as to be locked in a state where they are arranged at appropriate positions, and can be moved by releasing the lock.
  • the controller 120 detects the opening / closing of each cover and the locked state of the movable unit.
  • the control unit 120 is configured to detect the necessity of work such as maintenance and bill collection.
  • the control unit 120 is configured to detect bill jamming, tape jamming, necessity for replacement / replenishment of consumable parts, necessity for bill collection, and the like by various sensors.
  • FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating locations where the necessity of work in the banknote handling apparatus 100 is detected.
  • the banknote handling apparatus 100 includes a banknote jam in the peripheral area R1 of the take-in roller 23, a banknote jam in the peripheral area R2 of the identification unit 3, and a section R3 between the identification unit 3 and the first branch path 72a in the main transport path 71.
  • Banknote jam in the section R4 of the first branch path 72a banknote jam in the section R5 between the second branch path 72b and the third branch path 72c of the main transport path 71, and the first of the main transport path 71.
  • control unit 120 When the control unit 120 detects the necessity of the above work, the control unit 120 guides the operator. Specifically, the control unit 120 displays the work procedure on the touch panel 17 by animation or the like, and irradiates the work location inside the housing 12 with the LED. An LED is provided in the vicinity of the work location inside the housing 12. The light source is not limited to the LED.
  • the touch panel 17 when guiding a work for banknote jam in the main transport path 71 between the identification unit 3 and the first branch path 72a, includes instructions for opening the lower cover 131, the first and second instructions. Instructions for unlocking the units of the non-binding stackers 5A and 5B, instructions for moving parts of the main transport path 71, instructions for removing bills, and some units of the main transport path 71. The operation instruction for returning the unit, the operation instruction for returning the units of the first and second non-bundling stackers 5A and 5B, and the operation instruction for closing the lower cover 131 are sequentially displayed.
  • the control unit 120 irradiates the work location inside the housing 12 with the LED in conjunction with the display of the work on the touch panel 17.
  • the control unit 120 irradiates the unit of the second non-binding stacker 5B that performs unlocking with the LED.
  • the control unit 120 turns off the LED and irradiates a part of the main transport path 71 with the LED.
  • the control unit 120 turns off the LED, and irradiates the area where the banknote is jammed, that is, the periphery of the sensor that detects the banknote jam, with the LED.
  • the control unit 120 turns off the LED and irradiates a part of the main conveyance path 71 with the LED.
  • the control unit 120 turns off the LED and irradiates the unit of the second non-bundling stacker 5B with the LED.
  • the control unit 120 turns off the LED.
  • LED light-emit when making LED light-emit, it may turn on and may blink.
  • work is irradiated with LED
  • region you may irradiate LED corresponding to this area
  • the banknote processing apparatus 100 is a paper sheet binding apparatus that binds the stacked banknotes with the tape T, and compresses the stacked banknotes from both sides in the stacking direction.
  • the stamping portion 98 compresses the banknotes with the clamp portion 94 and applies the tape T to the banknotes. Is stamped on the tape T.
  • the position of the banknote is fixed.
  • the tape T is wound with respect to the banknote in which the position was settled, the position of this tape T is also generally decided. That is, since the position of the tape T is known when the banknotes are bundled in a state compressed by the clamp portion 94, the tape T can be easily and accurately stamped by performing the stamping at this timing.
  • the stamping part 98 stamps from the stacking direction.
  • the banknote handling apparatus 100 includes a heater 95 that joins the tapes T with the tape T wrapped around the banknotes, and a cutter 96 that cuts the tape T at a position where the tapes T are not wrapped around the banknotes.
  • the heater 95 and the cutter 96 are disposed on one side in the stacking direction of the banknotes, and the stamp portion 98 is disposed on the other side in the stacking direction of the banknotes.
  • the heater 95 and the cutter 96 and the stamping portion 98 are separately arranged on both sides in the banknote stacking direction, the space for arranging the heater 95 and the cutter 96 and the space for arranging the stamping portion 98 are reduced. Each can be secured.
  • the banknote processing apparatus 100 is provided with the heater 95 which joins this tape T in the state which wound the said tape T around the said banknote, and the cutter 96 which cut
  • the banknote handling apparatus 100 includes a guide portion 925 having a pair of side walls 926a and 926a that regulates the position of the tape T in the width direction when the tape T is wound around the banknote, and the stamp portion 98 includes It is arranged between the pair of side walls 926a, 926a.
  • the tape T is wound around the bill in a state where the position of the tape T in the width direction is regulated by the guide portion 925.
  • the stamp part 98 is arrange
  • the guide portion 925 restricts the position in the width direction of the tape T so as to substantially correspond to the stamp position by the stamp portion 98. As a result, it is possible to accurately stamp without protruding from the tape T.
  • the banknote handling apparatus 100 includes a printing unit 97 that prints on the tape T, and the stamping unit 98 and the printing unit 97 include the position of the stamping by the stamping unit 98 and the printing by the printing unit 97 as the tape. They are arranged so as not to overlap each other by shifting in the width direction of T.
  • the position where the stamping portion 98 is stamped on the tape T can be accurately set, so that the position of the stamping by the stamping portion 98 and the printing by the printing portion 97 are in the width direction of the tape T.
  • the positions of the stamps by the stamp part 98 can be set so that they do not overlap and overlap each other.
  • the bundling portion 9 creates a tape ring L with the tape T, and after the banknote is placed in the tape ring L, pulls back the tape T and winds the tape T around the banknote.
  • the tape ring creating section 92 has a feeding section that feeds out the tape T when creating the tape loop L, and forms the tape ring L at a position lower than the feeding section.
  • the tape ring L swells downward from the delivery part, and finally the tape ring L is created at a position lower than the delivery part. Since the tape T is flexible, if the tape ring L is inflated upward, a part of the tape ring L may be bent downward due to the weight of the tape T during the production of the tape ring L. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the tape ring L is inflated downward, the tape ring L is not easily bent during the production of the tape ring L. That is, the tape ring L can be appropriately created.
  • the banknote handling apparatus 100 has been described as an example of the paper sheet bundling apparatus, but the paper sheet bundling apparatus is not limited to this.
  • the identification, distribution, and accumulation of paper sheets may be performed by another apparatus, and the paper sheet bundling apparatus may be an apparatus that sets the accumulated paper sheets and only binds the paper sheets.
  • the banknote was demonstrated as an example of paper sheets, paper sheets are not restricted to a banknote, A cash voucher, such as a gift certificate, may be sufficient.
  • the configuration of the banknote handling apparatus 100 is an example and is not limited thereto.
  • the banknote handling apparatus 100 includes two binding stackers 4, two non-binding stackers 5, and one reject stacker 6, but the number of these is not limited to this.
  • the number of binding stackers 4 may be one or three or more.
  • the number of non-binding stackers 5 may be one or three or more.
  • the number of reject stackers 6 may be two or more.
  • the non-binding stacker 5 and the reject stacker 6 may be omitted.
  • the intake port 24, the outlet 111 and the reject outlet 63 are provided on the first side surface 123, and the first outlet 47, the second outlet 53, and the touch panel 17 are provided on the second side surface 124.
  • the said banknote processing apparatus 100 is performing the same kind bundling process, it is not restricted to this.
  • the banknote processing apparatus 100 divides and stacks different types of banknotes into two binding stackers 4 and 4 for a plurality of types of banknotes as binding targets, and stacks the predetermined number of banknotes for each binding stacker 4.
  • a plurality of types of bundling processes for bundling at 9 may be performed. That is, the banknotes stacked on the first binding stacker 4A and the banknotes stacked on the second binding stacker 4B are different in type.
  • the said banknote processing apparatus 100 processes the banknote of the rose state in which the banknote of several denominations was mixed, it is not restricted to this.
  • the banknote processing apparatus 100 may be configured to process banknotes of a predetermined one type of denomination.
  • the method of creating the large tape ring L2 is not limited to the method of the above embodiment.
  • the large tape ring L2 may be created by guiding the tape T with a guide having the shape of the large tape ring L2 while the feeding roller pair 920 is feeding the tape T.
  • a transport unit such as an arm that grips the tape T transports the tape along the shape of the large tape loop L2, thereby creating the large tape loop L2. Also good.
  • the longitudinal direction center of the banknote B is bundled, it is not restricted to this.
  • the bills B may be bundled so that the edge of the tape T is located at the center of the bill B in the longitudinal direction.
  • the amount by which the second transport unit 8 transports the bill B into the large tape ring L2 is adjusted. That is, compared with the said embodiment, the conveyance amount of the banknote B decreases.
  • the position of the temporary holding part 93 is adjusted according to the insertion amount (namely, conveyance amount) of the banknote into the large tape ring L2 by the 2nd conveyance part 8.
  • the temporary gripping portion 93 moves away from the tape T in the second horizontal direction as the insertion amount of the bill B increases.
  • the temporary holding part 93 is located near the tape T compared with the said embodiment. That is, the temporary gripping part 93 grips the banknote B near the tape T as the insertion amount of the banknote B is small. As a result, even when the insertion amount of the bill B is small, the temporary gripping portion 93 can appropriately grip the bill B.
  • the stamp part 98 is arrange
  • the stamp part 98 may be arranged at an arbitrary place. Moreover, you may make it the stamp part 98 stamp on the tape T from arbitrary directions.
  • the stamp portion 98 may stamp the tape T from a direction orthogonal to the stacking direction.
  • the stamping portion 98 is configured to stamp the tape T in a state where the tape T is wound around the banknote B in the bundling portion 9, the stamping position on the tape T can be made substantially constant.
  • the position of the banknote B is constant, and the position of the tape T wound around the banknote B is also constant. Therefore, if the tape T is wound around the banknote B in the bundling portion 9, the stamped position on the tape T is made substantially constant without detecting and regulating the position of the banknote B and the position of the tape T. be able to.
  • the joining process by the heater 95 and the cutting process by the cutter 96 and the stamping process by the stamping part 98 are performed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the joining process by the heater 95 and the cutting process by the cutter 96 and the stamping process by the stamping part 98 may be completely shifted in time, or may be partially overlapped in time. A process may completely overlap in time with respect to the other process.
  • stacked on the binding stacker 4 is compressed by raising the stage 41, it is not restricted to this.
  • the 2nd conveyance part 8 is compressing and clamping the banknote B compressed with the stage 41 and the top plate 44, it is not restricted to this.
  • the second transport unit 8 may sandwich the banknote B compressed by the stage 41 and the top plate 44 with the same compressive force as the stage 41 and the top plate 44. In that case, you may make it the stage 41 descend
  • the banknote B compressed by the stage 41 and the top plate 44 can be smoothly delivered to the second transport unit 8. Moreover, the 2nd conveyance part 8 can pull out this banknote from the binding stacker 4 easily.
  • the stacking direction of the banknotes stacked on the bundling stacker 4 coincides with the vertical direction, but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • banknotes may be stacked in a substantially horizontal direction. That is, the banknotes are accommodated while standing in the binding stacker 4.
  • the accumulated banknotes are in a state of leaning against a wall portion in the binding stacker 4 whose normal is directed in a substantially horizontal direction.
  • a support portion such as a wall is provided at one end side of the stacked banknotes in the stacking direction, and the stacked banknotes are supported.
  • a compression unit that presses the banknotes in the stacking direction from the side opposite to the support unit is provided.
  • the stacked banknotes are compressed in the stacking direction, that is, in a substantially horizontal direction by the compression unit and the support unit.
  • the technique disclosed herein is useful for a paper sheet bundling apparatus that binds collected paper sheets with a tape.

Abstract

 A banknote processing device (100) is a paper-sheet-binding device for binding accumulated banknotes using a tape (T). The banknote processing device (100) is provided with a clamping unit (94) for compressing the accumulated banknotes from both sides in the accumulation direction, a binding unit (9) for binding the banknotes compressed by the clamping unit (94) by using the tape (T), and a seal-affixing unit (98) for affixing a seal on the tape (T). The seal-affixing unit (98) affixes a seal on the tape (T) while the banknotes are compressed by the clamping unit (94) and wrapped by the tape (T).

Description

紙葉類結束装置Paper sheet bundling device
 ここに開示された技術は、集積された紙葉類をテープで結束する紙葉類結束装置に関するものである。 The technology disclosed herein relates to a paper sheet bundling apparatus that binds collected paper sheets with a tape.
 特許文献1には、紙葉類をテープで結束する結束装置が開示されている。この結束装置では、集積部において紙幣を集積し、集積された紙幣は、結束部へ搬送されて結束される。その後、結束された紙幣は、投出部へ搬送される。その途中で押印部によりテープに押印がなされる。 Patent Document 1 discloses a bundling device for bundling paper sheets with a tape. In this binding device, banknotes are stacked in the stacking unit, and the stacked banknotes are conveyed to the binding unit and bound. Thereafter, the bundled banknotes are conveyed to the dispensing unit. In the middle, the stamp is made on the tape by the stamping portion.
特許第4619740号公報Japanese Patent No. 4619740
 しかしながら、特許文献1に係る結束装置のように、結束紙幣の搬送途中にテープに押印する構成においては、押印時にテープの位置を把握しておく必要がある。そのためには、搬送途中における結束紙幣の位置決めやテープの検知等が必要となり、処理が複雑になる。 However, in the configuration in which the tape is stamped in the middle of transporting the bundled bills as in the binding device according to Patent Document 1, it is necessary to grasp the position of the tape at the time of stamping. For this purpose, it is necessary to position the bundled banknotes in the middle of conveyance, to detect the tape, etc., and the processing becomes complicated.
 ここに開示された技術は、かかる点に鑑みてなされたものであり、紙葉類を結束するテープに対して簡単に且つ精度良く押印することにある。 The technique disclosed here is made in view of such a point, and is to easily and accurately stamp a tape for binding paper sheets.
 ここに開示された技術は、集積された紙葉類をテープで結束する紙葉類結束装置を対象としている。この紙葉類結束装置は、集積された紙葉類を集積方向の両側から圧縮するクランプ部と、前記クランプ部で圧縮した紙葉類を前記テープで結束する結束部と、前記テープに押印する押印部とを備え、前記押印部は、前記クランプ部で前記紙葉類を圧縮し且つ該紙葉類に前記テープを巻き付けた状態で該テープに押印するものとする。 The technique disclosed herein is intended for a paper sheet bundling apparatus that bundles collected paper sheets with a tape. The paper sheet bundling device includes a clamp unit that compresses the stacked paper sheets from both sides in the stacking direction, a bundling unit that binds the paper sheets compressed by the clamp unit with the tape, and stamps the tape. A stamping portion, and the stamping portion compresses the paper sheet with the clamp portion and stamps the tape with the tape wound around the paper sheet.
 前記の構成によれば、紙葉類を結束する際にクランプ部によって紙葉類を圧縮するので、紙葉類の位置は定まっている。そして、位置が定まった紙葉類に対してテープが巻き付けられるので、該テープの位置も概ね決まっている。つまり、紙葉類をクランプ部で圧縮した状態で結束する際にはテープの位置がわかっているので、このタイミングで押印を行うことによってテープに対して簡単且つ精度良く押印することができる。 According to the above configuration, since the paper sheets are compressed by the clamp portion when the paper sheets are bound, the position of the paper sheets is fixed. And since the tape is wound around the paper sheet whose position has been determined, the position of the tape is generally determined. That is, since the position of the tape is known when the paper sheets are bundled in a state compressed by the clamp portion, it is possible to easily and accurately stamp the tape by performing the stamping at this timing.
 また、前記押印部は、前記集積方向から押印するものであってもよい。 Further, the stamp portion may be stamped from the stacking direction.
 この場合、紙葉類の圧縮方向から押印される。 In this case, it is stamped from the direction of paper sheet compression.
 さらに、紙葉類結束装置は、前記テープを前記紙葉類に巻き付けた状態で該テープ同士を接合する接合部と、前記テープを前記紙葉類に巻き付けられていない位置で切断する切断部とを備え、前記接合部及び切断部は、前記紙葉類の前記集積方向の一方側に配置され、前記押印部は、前記紙葉類の前記集積方向の他方側に配置されていてもよい。 Furthermore, the paper sheet bundling device includes a joining part that joins the tapes in a state where the tape is wound around the paper sheets, and a cutting part that cuts the tape at a position where the tapes are not wound around the paper sheets. The joining portion and the cutting portion may be disposed on one side of the paper sheet in the stacking direction, and the stamping portion may be disposed on the other side of the paper sheet in the stacking direction.
 この構成によれば、接合部及び切断部と押圧部とが紙葉類の集積方向の両側に分けて配置されるので、接合部及び切断部の配設スペースと押印部の配設スペースとをそれぞれ確保することができる。 According to this configuration, since the joining portion, the cutting portion, and the pressing portion are arranged separately on both sides in the paper stacking direction, the placement space for the joining portion and the cutting portion and the placement space for the stamp portion are reduced. Each can be secured.
 また、紙葉類結束装置は、前記テープを前記紙葉類に巻き付けた状態で該テープ同士を接合する接合部と、前記テープを前記紙葉類に巻き付けられていない位置で切断する切断部とを備え、前記押印部による押印処理の少なくとも一部は、前記接合部による接合処理及び/又は前記切断部による切断処理と時間的に重複して行われてもよい。 Further, the paper sheet bundling device includes a joining portion that joins the tapes in a state where the tape is wound around the paper sheets, and a cutting portion that cuts the tape at a position where the tape is not wrapped around the paper sheets. And at least a part of the stamping process by the stamping part may be performed in a time-overlapping manner with the joining process by the joining part and / or the cutting process by the cutting part.
 前記の構成によれば、押印処理、接合処理及び切断処理を含む結束処理全体の処理時間を短縮することができる。 According to the above configuration, it is possible to shorten the processing time of the entire bundling process including the stamping process, the bonding process, and the cutting process.
 また、前記押印部は、前記集積方向と直交する方向から押印するものであってもよい。 Further, the stamp portion may be stamped from a direction orthogonal to the stacking direction.
 さらに、紙葉類結束装置は、前記テープを前記紙葉類に巻き付ける際に該テープの幅方向の位置を規制する一対の側壁を有するガイド部を備え、前記押印部は、前記一対の側壁の間に配置されていてもよい。 Further, the paper sheet bundling device includes a guide portion having a pair of side walls that regulate a position of the tape in the width direction when the tape is wound around the paper sheets, and the stamping portion is formed of the pair of side walls. You may arrange | position between.
 前記の構成によれば、テープは、ガイド部によってテープの幅方向の位置が規制された状態で紙葉類に巻き付けられる。そして、押印部は、テープの幅方向の位置を規制するガイド部の一対の側壁の間に配置されている。つまり、ガイド部は、テープの幅方向位置を実質的に押印部による押印位置に対応するように規制している。その結果、テープからはみ出すことなく正確に押印することができる。 According to the above configuration, the tape is wound around the paper sheet in a state where the position in the width direction of the tape is regulated by the guide portion. And the stamp part is arrange | positioned between a pair of side walls of the guide part which regulates the position of the width direction of a tape. In other words, the guide portion restricts the position in the width direction of the tape so as to substantially correspond to the stamp position by the stamp portion. As a result, it is possible to accurately stamp without protruding from the tape.
 また、紙葉類結束装置は、前記テープに印字する印字部を備え、前記押印部及び前記印字部は、該押印部による押印の位置と該印字部による印字とが前記テープの幅方向にずれて互いに重なり合わないように配置されていてもよい。 The paper sheet bundling device includes a printing unit that prints on the tape, and the stamping unit and the printing unit have a shift in the width direction of the tape between the position of the stamping by the stamping unit and the printing by the printing unit. They may be arranged so as not to overlap each other.
 前記の構成によれば、テープに対して押印部で押印する位置を正確に設定することができるので、押印部による押印の位置と印字部による印字とがテープの幅方向にずれて互いに重なり合わないように押印部による押印の位置を設定することができる。 According to the above configuration, the position where the stamping portion is stamped with respect to the tape can be accurately set, so that the stamping position by the stamping portion and the printing by the printing portion are shifted in the width direction of the tape and overlap each other. The position of the stamp by the stamp part can be set so that there is no.
 また、前記結束部は、前記テープでテープ輪を作成し、前記紙葉類が該テープ輪の中に配置された後に該テープを引き戻して該テープを該紙葉類に巻き付けるテープ輪作成部を有し、前記テープ輪作成部は、前記テープ輪を作成する際に前記テープを送り出す送り出し部を有し、該テープ輪を該送り出し部よりも低い位置に形成するものであってもよい。 The bundling portion includes a tape loop creating unit that creates a tape loop with the tape, and after the paper sheet is disposed in the tape loop, pulls the tape back and winds the tape around the paper sheet. The tape ring creating section may include a feeding section that feeds out the tape when the tape loop is created, and the tape ring may be formed at a position lower than the feeding section.
 前記の構成によれば、テープ輪は、送り出し部の下方へ向かって膨らんでいき、最終的に送り出し部よりも低い位置にテープ輪が作成される。テープは柔軟であるため、テープ輪を上向きに膨らませていくと、テープ輪の作成途中でテープ輪の一部がテープの自重により下方へ撓んでしまう虞がある。それに対し、テープ輪を下向きに膨らませていく構成においては、テープ輪の作成途中でテープ輪が撓み難い。つまり、テープ輪を適切に作成することができる。 According to the above configuration, the tape ring bulges downward from the delivery part, and finally the tape ring is created at a position lower than the delivery part. Since the tape is flexible, if the tape ring is inflated upward, a part of the tape ring may be bent downward due to the weight of the tape during the production of the tape ring. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the tape ring is inflated downward, the tape ring is not easily bent during the production of the tape ring. That is, the tape ring can be appropriately created.
 前記紙葉類結束装置によれば、紙葉類を結束するテープに対して簡単に且つ精度良く押印することができる。 According to the paper sheet bundling device, it is possible to easily and accurately stamp a tape for bundling paper sheets.
図1は、紙幣処理装置の外観図である。FIG. 1 is an external view of a banknote handling apparatus. 図2は、紙幣処理装置の概略構成図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic configuration diagram of the banknote handling apparatus. 図3は、結束スタッカ及び結束部の概略構成図である。FIG. 3 is a schematic configuration diagram of the binding stacker and the binding unit. 図4は、テープ把持部の斜視図であり、(A)は、テープ把持部の閉状態を示し、(B)は、テープ把持部の開状態を示す。4A and 4B are perspective views of the tape gripping portion, where FIG. 4A shows a closed state of the tape gripping portion and FIG. 4B shows an open state of the tape gripping portion. 図5は、テープ輪作成部の斜視図である。FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the tape loop creating unit. 図6は、テープ輪作成部の下部を斜め上方から見た斜視図である。FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the lower part of the tape ring creating unit as viewed obliquely from above. 図7は、テープ輪作成部の上部を斜め下方から見た斜視図である。FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the upper part of the tape loop creating part as seen from obliquely below. 図8は、紙幣処理装置の概略構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the banknote handling apparatus. 図9は、結束スタッカにおける紙幣の圧縮処理の説明図であり、(A)は、紙幣の集積完了直後の状態を示し、(B)は、紙幣の圧縮完了後の状態を示す。FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of banknote compression processing in the binding stacker, where (A) shows a state immediately after completion of banknote accumulation, and (B) shows a state after completion of banknote compression. 図10は、第2搬送部が紙幣を結束スタッカから抜き出した状態の図である。FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the second transport unit has pulled out banknotes from the binding stacker. 図11は、第2搬送部が紙幣をテープ輪の側方まで搬送した状態の図である。FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the second transport unit transports the banknote to the side of the tape ring. 図12は、テープ把持部がテープの先端部を把持した状態の図である。FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a state where the tape gripping part grips the leading end of the tape. 図13は、テープ把持部がテープの先端部を把持した状態で回転し始めた状態の図である。FIG. 13 is a diagram of a state in which the tape gripping portion starts to rotate while gripping the leading end portion of the tape. 図14は、テープ把持部が小テープ輪を作成した状態の図である。FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a state where the tape gripper has created a small tape ring. 図15は、大テープ輪の作成が完了した状態の図である。FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a state in which the creation of the large tape ring is completed. 図16は、紙幣の厚み方向を向いて見たときの、紙幣が大テープ輪へ搬送されて一時把持部に把持されるまでの各部の動作説明図であって、(A)は、紙幣が大テープ輪へ搬送される直前の状態、(B)は、紙幣が大テープ輪へ搬送された状態、(C)は、紙幣が一時把持部により把持された状態を示す。FIG. 16 is an operation explanatory diagram of each part until the banknote is conveyed to the large tape ring and gripped by the temporary gripping part when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote. A state immediately before being conveyed to the large tape ring, (B) shows a state in which the banknote is conveyed to the large tape ring, and (C) shows a state in which the banknote is gripped by the temporary gripping portion. 図17は、紙幣の短手方向を向いて見たときの、紙幣が大テープ輪へ搬送されて一時把持部に把持されるまでの各部の動作説明図であって、(A)は、紙幣が大テープ輪へ搬送される直前の状態、(B)は、紙幣が大テープ輪へ搬送された状態、(C)は、紙幣が一時把持部により把持された状態を示す。FIG. 17 is an operation explanatory view of each part until the banknote is conveyed to the large tape ring and gripped by the temporary gripping part when viewed in the short direction of the banknote. Is a state immediately before being conveyed to the large tape ring, (B) is a state where the banknote is conveyed to the large tape ring, and (C) is a state where the banknote is gripped by the temporary gripping portion. 図18は、紙幣の厚み方向を向いて見たときの、把持ユニットが紙幣を持ち直し、紙幣にテープが巻き付けられるまでの各部の動作説明図であって、(A)は、把持ユニットが紙幣を持ち直した状態、(B)は、クランプ部が紙幣を押圧した状態、(C)は、紙幣にテープが巻き付けられた状態を示す。FIG. 18 is an operation explanatory view of each part until the gripping unit picks up the banknote and the tape is wound around the banknote when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote. The state where it was picked up again, (B) shows the state where the clamp part presses the banknote, and (C) shows the state where the tape is wound around the banknote. 図19は、紙幣の短手方向を向いて見たときの、把持ユニットが紙幣を持ち直し、紙幣にテープが巻き付けられるまでの各部の動作説明図であって、(A)は、把持ユニットが紙幣を持ち直した状態、(B)は、クランプ部が紙幣を押圧した状態、(C)は、紙幣にテープが巻き付けられた状態を示す。FIG. 19 is an operation explanatory view of each part until the gripping unit picks up the banknote and the tape is wound around the banknote when viewed in the short direction of the banknote. (B) shows a state in which the clamp portion presses the banknote, and (C) shows a state in which the tape is wound around the banknote. 図20は、クランプ部が紙幣を押圧したときのガイド部の状態の図である。FIG. 20 is a diagram of the state of the guide portion when the clamp portion presses the banknote. 図21は、テープの接合、切断及び押印の説明図であり、(A)は、第1及び第2テープ押えがテープを押さえた状態を示し、(B)は、ヒータがテープを溶着し、カッタがテープを切断した状態を示す。FIG. 21 is an explanatory view of joining, cutting and stamping of the tape, (A) shows a state in which the first and second tape pressers hold the tape, (B) shows a heater welding the tape, The state where the cutter cut the tape is shown. 図22は、紙幣の厚み方向を向いて見たときの、結束紙幣が投出部へ投出されるまでの各部の動作説明図であって、(A)は、結束紙幣を第2水平方向へ抜き出した状態、(B)は、第3搬送部が結束紙幣を把持した状態、(C)第3搬送部が結束紙幣を投出部まで搬送した状態を示す。FIG. 22 is an operation explanatory view of each part until the bundled banknotes are thrown out to the dispensing unit when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknotes, and (A) shows the bundled banknotes in the second horizontal direction. The extracted state, (B), shows a state where the third transport unit grips the bundled banknote, and (C) shows a state where the third transport unit transports the bundled banknote to the dispensing unit. 図23は、紙幣の短手方向を向いて見たときの、結束紙幣が投出部へ投出されるまでの各部の動作説明図であって、(A)は、結束紙幣を第2水平方向へ抜き出した状態、(B)は、第3搬送部が結束紙幣を把持した状態を示す。FIG. 23 is an operation explanatory view of each part until the bundled banknotes are thrown out to the dispensing unit when viewed in the short direction of the banknotes, and (A) shows the bundled banknotes in the second horizontal direction. The state extracted to (B) shows a state in which the third transport unit grips the bundled banknotes. 図24は、紙幣処理装置における作業の必要性を検知する箇所を示す図である。FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a part for detecting the necessity of work in the banknote handling apparatus. 図25は、その他の実施形態に係る、紙幣の厚み方向を向いて見たときの、紙幣が大テープ輪へ搬送されて一時把持部に把持され、把持ユニットが持ち直すまでの各部の動作説明図であって、(A)は、紙幣が大テープ輪へ搬送された状態、(B)は、把持ユニットが紙幣を持ち直した状態を示す。FIG. 25 is an operation explanatory diagram of each part until the bill is transported to the large tape ring and gripped by the temporary gripping portion and is held by the gripping unit when viewed in the thickness direction of the bill according to another embodiment. (A) shows a state in which the banknote is conveyed to the large tape ring, and (B) shows a state in which the gripping unit has picked up the banknote.
 以下、実施形態を図面に基づいて詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
 〈紙幣処理装置の概略構成〉
 図1は、紙幣処理装置100の外観図を示し、図2は、紙幣処理装置100の概略構成図を示す。
<Schematic configuration of banknote handling apparatus>
FIG. 1 shows an external view of the banknote handling apparatus 100, and FIG. 2 shows a schematic configuration diagram of the banknote handling apparatus 100.
 紙幣処理装置100は、例えば銀行のテラーカウンタに設置され、オペレータによって使用される。紙幣処理装置100は、バラ状態の紙幣を取り込み、所定の種類の紙幣を集積し、該紙幣を所定の結束枚数で結束して投出する。 The banknote handling apparatus 100 is installed, for example, in a bank teller counter and used by an operator. The banknote handling apparatus 100 takes in banknotes in a loose state, accumulates predetermined types of banknotes, binds the banknotes in a predetermined number of bundles, and throws them out.
 紙幣処理装置100は、紙幣が載置され、該紙幣を取り込むホッパ部2と、紙幣を識別する識別部3と、結束対象の紙幣を集積する結束スタッカ4と、結束対象でない紙幣を集積する非結束スタッカ5と、リジェクト紙幣を集積するリジェクトスタッカ6と、ホッパ部2から取り込まれた紙幣を、識別部3、結束スタッカ4、非結束スタッカ5及びリジェクトスタッカ6に搬送する第1搬送部7と、結束スタッカ4に集積された紙幣を所定の位置まで搬送する第2搬送部8と、第2搬送部8により搬送された紙幣を結束する結束部9と、結束された紙幣(以下、「結束紙幣」という)を搬送する第3搬送部10と、結束紙幣を投出する投出部11と、識別部3、結束スタッカ4、非結束スタッカ5、リジェクトスタッカ6、第1搬送部7、第2搬送部8、結束部9及び第3搬送部10を収容する箱状の筐体12とを備えている。 The banknote handling apparatus 100 is configured to stack a banknote on which a banknote is placed, a hopper section 2 that takes in the banknote, an identification section 3 that identifies the banknote, a binding stacker 4 that stacks banknotes to be bound, and a banknote that is not to be bound. A binding stacker 5, a reject stacker 6 for collecting rejected banknotes, and a first transport section 7 for transporting banknotes taken from the hopper section 2 to the identification section 3, the binding stacker 4, the unbound stacker 5, and the reject stacker 6. , A second transport unit 8 that transports the banknotes accumulated in the binding stacker 4 to a predetermined position, a binding unit 9 that binds banknotes transported by the second transport unit 8, and a bundled banknote (hereinafter, “binding” 3rd conveyance part 10 which conveys a banknote ", the discharge part 11 which throws out a bundled banknote, the identification part 3, the bundling stacker 4, the non-bundling stacker 5, the reject stacker 6, the 1st conveyance part 7, 2 the conveyor 8, and a box-shaped casing 12 that houses the bundling unit 9 and the third conveying unit 10.
 筐体12は、上面121と、下面122と4つの側面とを有している。筐体12は、卓上型である。つまり、筐体12の下面122には、キャスタ等が設けられておらず、卓上に設置される構造となっている。 The housing 12 has an upper surface 121, a lower surface 122, and four side surfaces. The housing 12 is a desktop type. That is, the lower surface 122 of the housing 12 is not provided with casters or the like, and is configured to be installed on a table.
 筐体12の4つの側面のうちの1つの側面である第1側面123には、ホッパ部2及び投出部11が設けられている。4つの側面のうちの1つの側面である第2側面124には、詳しくは後述する結束スタッカ4の第1取出口47及び非結束スタッカ5の第2取出口53が設けられている。第1側面123と第2側面124とは、隣接している。 The first side surface 123 that is one of the four side surfaces of the housing 12 is provided with the hopper portion 2 and the dispensing portion 11. The second side surface 124, which is one of the four side surfaces, is provided with a first outlet 47 of the bundling stacker 4 and a second outlet 53 of the non-bundling stacker 5, which will be described in detail later. The first side surface 123 and the second side surface 124 are adjacent to each other.
 筐体12の内部は、紙幣の識別及び分類に関する処理を行う第1処理部126と、結束対象の紙幣の結束に関する処理を行う第2処理部127とに別れている。第2処理部127は、第1処理部126の上方に設けられている。第1処理部126には、ホッパ部2、識別部3、非結束スタッカ5及びリジェクトスタッカ6が含まれる。第2処理部127には、結束スタッカ4、第2搬送部8、結束部9及び第3搬送部10が含まれる。第1搬送部7の大部分は、第1処理部126に含まれている。 The inside of the housing 12 is divided into a first processing unit 126 that performs processing related to banknote identification and classification, and a second processing unit 127 that performs processing related to binding of banknotes to be bound. The second processing unit 127 is provided above the first processing unit 126. The first processing unit 126 includes a hopper unit 2, an identification unit 3, a non-binding stacker 5, and a reject stacker 6. The second processing unit 127 includes a binding stacker 4, a second transport unit 8, a binding unit 9, and a third transport unit 10. Most of the first transport unit 7 is included in the first processing unit 126.
 結束スタッカ4は、第1結束スタッカ4Aと第2結束スタッカ4Bとの2つのスタッカを含んでいる。第1結束スタッカ4Aと第2結束スタッカ4Bはともに、結束対象の紙幣を集積する。結束対象の紙幣として集積する紙幣は、適宜設定することができる。結束対象の紙幣は、所定の種類の紙幣である。所定の種類は、金種、正券か損券か、紙幣の表裏、紙幣の向き、新券か旧券かなどによって特定される。ここでは、結束対象の紙幣は、所定の金種(例えば、100元)であって且つ正券の紙幣である。ここで、識別部3によって正常な紙幣として識別された紙幣を「正常紙幣」と、識別部3で正常な紙幣として識別されなかった紙幣を「異常紙幣」と、斜行や重送等により搬送状態が異常な紙幣を「搬送異常紙幣」と称する。例えば、正常な紙幣か否かを判断する条件の1つとしては、記番号が識別可能であるか否かが挙げられる。ただし、それとは異なる条件をもって正常な紙幣か否かを判断してもよいし、それに別の条件を加えて正常な紙幣か否かを判断してもよい。また、正常紙幣であっても搬送先(結束スタッカ、非結束スタッカ等)が指定されていない種類の紙幣を「指定外紙幣」と称する。また、正常紙幣のうち、汚れや破れ等が比較的少ない状態の紙幣を「正券」と、正常紙幣のうち、汚れや破れ等が比較的多い状態の紙幣を「損券」と称する。結束スタッカ4は、集積部の一例である。 The binding stacker 4 includes two stackers, a first binding stacker 4A and a second binding stacker 4B. Both the first binding stacker 4A and the second binding stacker 4B accumulate the banknotes to be bound. The banknotes accumulated as the banknotes to be bound can be set as appropriate. The banknote to be bound is a predetermined type of banknote. The predetermined type is specified by the denomination, whether it is a correct or non-defective ticket, the front and back of the banknote, the direction of the banknote, whether it is a new or old ticket, and the like. Here, the banknote to be bound is a predetermined denomination (for example, 100 yuan) and a genuine banknote. Here, the banknotes identified as normal banknotes by the identification unit 3 are conveyed as “normal banknotes”, and the banknotes that are not identified as normal banknotes by the identification unit 3 are conveyed as “abnormal banknotes” by skew feeding or double feeding. A banknote in which the state is abnormal is referred to as a “transport abnormal banknote”. For example, one of the conditions for determining whether or not the banknote is normal is whether or not the serial number can be identified. However, it may be determined whether the banknote is normal under different conditions, or another condition may be added to determine whether the banknote is normal. In addition, even if it is a normal banknote, a banknote of a type in which a transport destination (a binding stacker, a non-binding stacker, etc.) is not designated is referred to as “non-designated banknote”. Further, among normal banknotes, a banknote with a relatively small amount of dirt, tears, and the like is referred to as a “correct ticket”, and among normal banknotes, a banknote with a relatively large number of dirt, tears, and the like is referred to as a “damaged ticket”. The bundling stacker 4 is an example of a stacking unit.
 第1及び第2結束スタッカ4A,4Bは、第2処理部127内において実質的に上下方向に並んで配置されている。第1結束スタッカ4Aは、第2結束スタッカ4Bの上方に位置している。第1結束スタッカ4Aと第2結束スタッカ4Bとは、同様の構成をしている。2つのスタッカを区別しないときには、単に「結束スタッカ4」と称する。結束スタッカ4の詳細な構成については後述する。 The first and second bundling stackers 4A and 4B are arranged substantially vertically in the second processing unit 127. The first binding stacker 4A is located above the second binding stacker 4B. The first bundling stacker 4A and the second bundling stacker 4B have the same configuration. When the two stackers are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as “binding stacker 4”. The detailed configuration of the bundling stacker 4 will be described later.
 非結束スタッカ5は、第1及び第2非結束スタッカ5A,5Bの2つのスタッカを含んでいる。第1及び第2非結束スタッカ5A,5Bは、第1処理部126内において実質的に水平方向に並んで配置されている。第2非結束スタッカ5Bの方が第1非結束スタッカ5Aよりもホッパ部2に近い位置に配置されている。2つのスタッカを区別しないときには、単に「非結束スタッカ5」と称する。非結束スタッカ5の詳細な構成については後述する。非結束スタッカ5に集積する紙幣は適宜設定することができる。ここでは、第1非結束スタッカ5Aは、前記所定の金種であって且つ損券を集積する。第2非結束スタッカ5Bは、前記所定の金種以外の金種の紙幣を集積する。 The non-bundling stacker 5 includes two stackers, the first and second non-bundling stackers 5A and 5B. The first and second non-bundling stackers 5A and 5B are arranged side by side in a substantially horizontal direction in the first processing unit 126. The second non-bundling stacker 5B is disposed closer to the hopper portion 2 than the first non-bundling stacker 5A. When the two stackers are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as “unbound stacker 5”. The detailed configuration of the non-binding stacker 5 will be described later. The banknotes stacked on the non-binding stacker 5 can be set as appropriate. Here, the first non-bundling stacker 5A is the predetermined denomination and accumulates non-use tickets. The second non-binding stacker 5B accumulates banknotes of denominations other than the predetermined denomination.
 リジェクトスタッカ6は、リジェクト紙幣を集積する。リジェクトスタッカ6は、第1及び第2非結束スタッカ5A,5Bよりもホッパ部2に近接している。リジェクトスタッカ6は、第1及び第2非結束スタッカ5A,5Bよりも少し上方に位置している。リジェクトスタッカ6の詳細な構成については後述する。リジェクトスタッカ6に集積する紙幣は適宜設定することができる。ここでは、リジェクトスタッカ6は、「指定外紙幣」、「異常紙幣」及び「搬送異常紙幣」をリジェクト紙幣として集積する。 The reject stacker 6 accumulates reject banknotes. The reject stacker 6 is closer to the hopper portion 2 than the first and second unbundled stackers 5A and 5B. The reject stacker 6 is positioned slightly above the first and second unbundled stackers 5A and 5B. The detailed configuration of the reject stacker 6 will be described later. The banknotes accumulated in the reject stacker 6 can be set as appropriate. Here, the reject stacker 6 accumulates “non-designated banknotes”, “abnormal banknotes”, and “conveyance abnormal banknotes” as reject banknotes.
 ホッパ部2は、第1側面123のうち第1処理部126に対応する部分に設けられ、投出部11は、第1側面123のうち第2処理部127に対応する部分に設けられている。 The hopper unit 2 is provided in a portion corresponding to the first processing unit 126 in the first side surface 123, and the dispensing unit 11 is provided in a portion corresponding to the second processing unit 127 in the first side surface 123. .
 ホッパ部2は、紙幣が載置される載置台21と、載置台21上に載置された紙幣を案内する2つのガイド部22,22と、取込ローラ23と、紙幣を取り込む取込口24と、載置台21上の紙幣を検知する紙幣センサ25とを有している。本実施形態では、紙幣が短手方向に取り込まれていくように、紙幣がホッパ部2に載置される。 The hopper unit 2 includes a mounting table 21 on which banknotes are mounted, two guide units 22 and 22 for guiding banknotes mounted on the mounting table 21, an intake roller 23, and an intake port for taking in banknotes. 24 and a banknote sensor 25 for detecting a banknote on the mounting table 21. In this embodiment, a banknote is mounted in the hopper part 2 so that a banknote is taken in a transversal direction.
 取込口24は、図1に示すように、載置台21と第1側面123とが交わる隅部に形成されている。載置台21は、取込口24に近づくに従って下方に位置するように傾斜している。これにより、載置台21上の紙幣は、自然と取込口24の方へ向かうようになっている。載置台21上に載置された紙幣は、取込口24から筐体12内へ取り込まれる。 As shown in FIG. 1, the inlet 24 is formed at a corner where the mounting table 21 and the first side surface 123 intersect. The mounting table 21 is inclined so as to be positioned downward as it approaches the intake port 24. Thereby, the banknote on the mounting table 21 goes to the intake port 24 naturally. The banknotes placed on the placement table 21 are taken into the housing 12 from the take-in port 24.
 また、紙幣センサ25は、取込口24の近傍に設けられている。紙幣センサ25は、光を送信する送信部と光を受信する受信部とを有し、送信部から出射されて受信部に到達する光が遮断されることによって紙幣を検知する。尚、後述する第1紙幣センサ45、第2紙幣センサ46、集積センサ52、集積センサ62、通過センサ74、第1テープセンサ9210、第2テープセンサ9211、第3テープセンサ926eも同様の構成をしている。紙幣センサ25は、載置台21上に載置された紙幣により光が遮断されるように配置されている。つまり、紙幣センサ25は、光が遮断されることによって、載置台21上に紙幣が載置されていることを検知することができる。 Further, the bill sensor 25 is provided in the vicinity of the intake port 24. The banknote sensor 25 includes a transmission unit that transmits light and a reception unit that receives light, and detects a banknote by blocking light that is emitted from the transmission unit and reaches the reception unit. The first bill sensor 45, the second bill sensor 46, the accumulation sensor 52, the accumulation sensor 62, the passage sensor 74, the first tape sensor 9210, the second tape sensor 9211, and the third tape sensor 926e described later have the same configuration. is doing. The bill sensor 25 is arranged such that light is blocked by the bill placed on the placing table 21. That is, the bill sensor 25 can detect that a bill is placed on the placement table 21 by blocking light.
 ガイド部22,22は、その間隔を調整可能に構成されている。つまり、ガイド部22,22の間隔は、載置台21上に載置された紙幣に合わせて調整される。 The guide portions 22 and 22 are configured so that the interval can be adjusted. That is, the interval between the guide portions 22 and 22 is adjusted according to the banknotes placed on the placement table 21.
 取込ローラ23は、キッカローラ23aと、フィードローラ23bと、ゲートローラ23cとを有している。キッカローラ23aは、部分的に載置台21から露出しており、載置台21上の紙幣のうち一番下の紙幣と接触している。キッカローラ23aは、載置台21上に載置された紙幣のうち一番下の紙幣を取込口24へ送り込む。こうして、紙幣が1枚ずつ取込口24から取り込まれていく。取込口24から送り込まれた紙幣は、フィードローラ23bとゲートローラ23cとで1枚ずつに分離されて、筐体12内へ取り込まれる。取り込まれた紙幣は、第1搬送部7へ送られる。 The take-in roller 23 has a kicker roller 23a, a feed roller 23b, and a gate roller 23c. The kicker roller 23 a is partially exposed from the mounting table 21 and is in contact with the lowest banknote among the banknotes on the mounting table 21. The kicker roller 23 a feeds the lowest banknote out of the banknotes placed on the placing table 21 to the loading port 24. In this way, banknotes are taken one by one from the take-in port 24. The bills fed from the take-in port 24 are separated one by one by the feed roller 23b and the gate roller 23c and taken into the housing 12. The taken banknote is sent to the first transport unit 7.
 投出部11は、結束紙幣が投出される投出口111を有している。投出部11においては、投出口111を介して、結束紙幣が紙幣の短手方向に投出される。 The throwing-out part 11 has the throwing-out port 111 into which a bundled banknote is thrown out. In the throwing-out part 11, a bundled banknote is thrown out in the transversal direction of a banknote through the outlet 111.
 第1搬送部7は、搬送ベルト等で構成されている。第1搬送部7は、主搬送路71と、主搬送路71から分岐する第1~第4分岐路72a~72dと、主搬送路71からの分岐箇所に設けられた振り分け機構73と、紙幣の通過を検知する複数の通過センサ74とを有している。第1搬送部7は、紙幣をその短手方向に搬送していく。第1搬送部7は、搬送部の一例である。 The first transport unit 7 is composed of a transport belt or the like. The first transport unit 7 includes a main transport path 71, first to fourth branch paths 72a to 72d branched from the main transport path 71, a sorting mechanism 73 provided at a branch point from the main transport path 71, and a bill And a plurality of passage sensors 74 for detecting the passage of. The 1st conveyance part 7 conveys a banknote in the transversal direction. The first transport unit 7 is an example of a transport unit.
 主搬送路71は、取込ローラ23から第1結束スタッカ4Aまで延びている。第1分岐路72aは、主搬送路71の最も上流側に位置しており、第1分岐路72aから下流側に向かって、第2分岐路72b、第3分岐路72c、第4分岐路72dがこの順で位置している。第1~第4分岐路72a~72dのそれぞれを区別しないときには、単に分岐路72と称する。第1分岐路72aは、リジェクトスタッカ6まで延びている。第2分岐路72bは、第2非結束スタッカ5Bまで延びている。第3分岐路72cは、第1非結束スタッカ5Aまで延びている。第4分岐路72dは、第2結束スタッカ4Bまで延びている。 The main transport path 71 extends from the take-in roller 23 to the first binding stacker 4A. The first branch path 72a is located on the most upstream side of the main conveyance path 71, and from the first branch path 72a toward the downstream side, the second branch path 72b, the third branch path 72c, and the fourth branch path 72d. Are in this order. When the first to fourth branch paths 72a to 72d are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as a branch path 72. The first branch path 72 a extends to the reject stacker 6. The second branch path 72b extends to the second non-bundling stacker 5B. The third branch path 72c extends to the first non-bundling stacker 5A. The fourth branch path 72d extends to the second binding stacker 4B.
 振り分け機構73は、ソレノイド(図示省略)によって駆動される。振り分け機構73は、主搬送路71を搬送された紙幣を分岐路72へ分岐させるか否かを振り分ける。各振り分け機構73の上流側には、通過センサ74が設けられている。通過センサ74は、紙幣センサ25と同様の構成をしている。つまり、通過センサ74の受信部における光の受信が中断され、その後に光の受信が再開されたことをもって、紙幣の通過を検知することができる。振り分け機構73は、紙幣を分岐路72へ導く際には、その直上流の通過センサ74が紙幣の通過を検知したことをもって作動する。 The distribution mechanism 73 is driven by a solenoid (not shown). The sorting mechanism 73 sorts whether or not the bills transported through the main transport path 71 are branched to the branch path 72. A passage sensor 74 is provided on the upstream side of each sorting mechanism 73. The passage sensor 74 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25. That is, the passage of the banknote can be detected when the reception of light in the receiving unit of the passage sensor 74 is interrupted and the light reception is resumed thereafter. The sorting mechanism 73 operates when the passage sensor 74 immediately upstream detects the passage of the bill when guiding the bill to the branch path 72.
 識別部3は、主搬送路71のうち第1分岐路72aよりも上流側に設けられている。識別部3は、搬送される紙幣の一枚一枚について、その金種、真偽及び正損を識別するように構成されている。具体的には、識別部3は、ラインセンサ31及び磁気センサ32を有し、紙幣の特徴を取得する。識別部3は、紙幣の特徴が、記憶している各種紙幣の特徴と一致するかを判定し、金種、真偽、及び正損を識別する。 The identification unit 3 is provided on the upstream side of the first branch path 72 a in the main transport path 71. The identification unit 3 is configured to identify the denomination, authenticity, and correctness of each banknote to be conveyed. Specifically, the identification part 3 has the line sensor 31 and the magnetic sensor 32, and acquires the characteristic of a banknote. The identification unit 3 determines whether the characteristics of the banknotes match the characteristics of the various banknotes stored therein, and identifies the denomination, authenticity, and correctness.
 尚、識別部3は、紙幣の特徴を取得するためのセンサであれば、ラインセンサ及び磁気センサに限られず、赤外線センサ及び紫外線センサ等のセンサを有していてもよい。ラインセンサ31は、紙幣に印字されている記番号を光学的に読み取る機能も有している。尚、識別部3におけるセンサ以外の機能を、後で述べる制御部120が行ってもよい。 In addition, if the identification part 3 is a sensor for acquiring the characteristic of a banknote, it will not be restricted to a line sensor and a magnetic sensor, You may have sensors, such as an infrared sensor and an ultraviolet sensor. The line sensor 31 also has a function of optically reading the serial number printed on the banknote. The control unit 120 described later may perform functions other than the sensor in the identification unit 3.
 結束部9は、集積された紙幣を結束する。詳しくは後述するが、結束部9は、テープ輪Lを作成し、該テープ輪Lの中へ紙幣が搬送された後にテープを引き戻し、紙幣をテープで結束する。 Bundle unit 9 binds stacked banknotes. As will be described in detail later, the bundling unit 9 creates a tape ring L, pulls the tape back after the banknote is conveyed into the tape ring L, and binds the banknote with the tape.
 第2搬送部8は、結束スタッカ4に集積された紙幣を把持して、該紙幣をテープ輪Lの中へ搬送する。第2搬送部8は、紙幣を把持する把持ユニット81と、把持ユニット81を水平方向であって且つ紙幣の短手方向(以下、「第1水平方向」という)へ移動させる第1水平移動機構と、把持ユニット81を水平方向であって且つ紙幣の長手方向(以下、「第2水平方向」という)へ移動させる第2水平移動機構と、把持ユニット81を上下方向へ移動させる上下移動機構とを有している。第2搬送部8は、紙葉類搬送部の一例である。 The second transport unit 8 grips the banknotes accumulated in the binding stacker 4 and transports the banknotes into the tape ring L. The second transport unit 8 includes a gripping unit 81 that grips a banknote, and a first horizontal movement mechanism that moves the gripping unit 81 in the horizontal direction and the short direction of the banknote (hereinafter referred to as “first horizontal direction”). A second horizontal movement mechanism that moves the gripping unit 81 in the horizontal direction and in the longitudinal direction of the banknote (hereinafter referred to as “second horizontal direction”), and a vertical movement mechanism that moves the gripping unit 81 in the vertical direction. have. The second transport unit 8 is an example of a paper sheet transport unit.
 把持ユニット81は、上アーム部81aと、上アーム部81aと相対向する下アーム部81bと、上アーム部81aを上下方向へ移動させる把持機構とを有している。上アーム部81aは、互いに平行に延びる3本の指部と、3本の指部を連結する連結部とを有している(図16参照)。同様に、下アーム部81bは、互いに平行に延びる3本の指部と、3本の指部を連結する連結部とを有している。把持機構は、上アーム部81aを上下方向に移動可能に支持すると共に、モータ及び駆動ベルトによって上アーム部81aを上下に移動させる。これにより、上アーム部81aと下アーム部81bとで紙幣を把持することができる。 The gripping unit 81 has an upper arm portion 81a, a lower arm portion 81b opposite to the upper arm portion 81a, and a gripping mechanism that moves the upper arm portion 81a in the vertical direction. The upper arm portion 81a has three finger portions that extend in parallel to each other and a connecting portion that connects the three finger portions (see FIG. 16). Similarly, the lower arm portion 81b has three finger portions that extend in parallel to each other and a connecting portion that connects the three finger portions. The gripping mechanism supports the upper arm portion 81a so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and moves the upper arm portion 81a up and down by a motor and a driving belt. Thereby, a banknote can be hold | gripped with the upper arm part 81a and the lower arm part 81b.
 第1水平移動機構は、把持ユニット81を第1水平方向に移動可能に支持しており、モータ及び駆動ベルトによって把持ユニット81を第1水平方向に移動させる。 The first horizontal movement mechanism supports the gripping unit 81 so as to be movable in the first horizontal direction, and moves the gripping unit 81 in the first horizontal direction by a motor and a driving belt.
 上下移動機構は、第1水平移動機構を上下方向に移動可能に支持しており、モータ及び駆動ベルトによって第1水平移動機構を上下方向に移動させる。 The vertical movement mechanism supports the first horizontal movement mechanism so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and moves the first horizontal movement mechanism in the vertical direction by a motor and a driving belt.
 第2水平移動機構は、上下移動機構を第2水平方向に移動可能に支持しており、モータ及び駆動ベルトによって上下移動機構を第2水平方向に移動させる。 The second horizontal movement mechanism supports the vertical movement mechanism so as to be movable in the second horizontal direction, and moves the vertical movement mechanism in the second horizontal direction by a motor and a driving belt.
 このように、把持ユニット81は、第1水平移動機構、第2水平移動機構及び上下移動機構によって直交する3軸に沿った方向に移動可能に構成されている。 Thus, the gripping unit 81 is configured to be movable in directions along three orthogonal axes by the first horizontal movement mechanism, the second horizontal movement mechanism, and the vertical movement mechanism.
 第3搬送部10は、結束紙幣を投出部11まで搬送する。第3搬送部10は、上把持部101と、下把持部102と、上把持部101及び下把持部102を第1水平方向へ移動させる水平移動機構とを有している。水平移動機構は、上把持部101を第1水平方向へ移動させる際に上把持部101を上下方向にも移動させる。詳しくは、第3搬送部10は、結束部9の側方を第1水平方向へ通過するように構成されている。第3搬送部10は、結束部9に対して投出部11と反対側に位置するときには、上把持部101は下把持部102から上方へ十分に離間している。上把持部101は、この位置から結束部9の結束紙幣へ近づくにつれて下方へ移動し、結束紙幣に到達したときには上把持部101と下把持部102とで結束紙幣を把持した状態となる。上把持部101及び下把持部102は、結束紙幣を把持した状態で結束紙幣を投出部11近傍まで搬送する。上把持部101は、投出部11の近傍において、投出部11へ近づくにつれて上方へ移動する。その結果、上把持部101と下把持部102とで把持された結束紙幣は、投出部11において上把持部101及び下把持部102による把持が解除され、投出部11へ投出される。 The third transport unit 10 transports the bundled banknotes to the dispensing unit 11. The third transport unit 10 includes an upper gripper 101, a lower gripper 102, and a horizontal movement mechanism that moves the upper gripper 101 and the lower gripper 102 in the first horizontal direction. The horizontal movement mechanism moves the upper gripper 101 in the vertical direction when moving the upper gripper 101 in the first horizontal direction. Specifically, the third transport unit 10 is configured to pass through the side of the binding unit 9 in the first horizontal direction. When the third transport unit 10 is located on the side opposite to the projecting unit 11 with respect to the bundling unit 9, the upper gripping part 101 is sufficiently separated upward from the lower gripping part 102. The upper gripping part 101 moves downward from this position as it approaches the bound banknote of the binding part 9, and when it reaches the bound banknote, the upper gripping part 101 and the lower gripper 102 grip the bound banknote. The upper holding unit 101 and the lower holding unit 102 convey the bundled banknotes to the vicinity of the dispensing unit 11 while holding the bundled banknotes. The upper gripping portion 101 moves upward in the vicinity of the throwing portion 11 as it approaches the throwing portion 11. As a result, the bundled banknotes gripped by the upper gripping portion 101 and the lower gripping portion 102 are released from the upper gripping portion 101 and the lower gripping portion 102 in the dispensing portion 11 and are thrown out to the dispensing portion 11.
 筐体12の第2側面124には、図1に示すように、紙幣処理装置100への情報を入力する操作部であり且つ紙幣処理装置100の情報を表示する表示部であるタッチパネル17が設けられている。タッチパネル17は、紙幣処理装置100を操作するオペレータに対するヒューマンインターフェース部分である。 As shown in FIG. 1, the second side surface 124 of the housing 12 is provided with a touch panel 17 that is an operation unit for inputting information to the banknote processing apparatus 100 and a display unit for displaying information on the banknote processing apparatus 100. It has been. The touch panel 17 is a human interface part for an operator who operates the banknote handling apparatus 100.
 〈結束スタッカ4の詳細構成〉
 図3に、結束スタッカ4及び結束部9の概略構成図を示す。
<Detailed Configuration of Bundling Stacker 4>
In FIG. 3, the schematic block diagram of the binding stacker 4 and the binding part 9 is shown.
 結束スタッカ4は、紙幣Bを積み重ねて集積する。結束スタッカ4は、図1~3に示すように、紙幣Bを集積する容器40と、容器40内に配置され、紙幣Bが載置されるステージ41と、搬送されてきた紙幣Bを容器40へ搬入する羽根車42と、後述する第1取出口47を開閉する扉43と、容器40の天井を規定する天板44と、容器40内の紙幣Bを検知する第1紙幣センサ45と、容器40内の所定高さの紙幣Bを検知する第2紙幣センサ46とを有している。 Bundled stacker 4 stacks banknotes B and accumulates them. As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the bundling stacker 4 includes a container 40 that accumulates banknotes B, a stage 41 that is placed in the container 40 and on which the banknotes B are placed, and the banknotes B that have been transported. An impeller 42 to be carried in, a door 43 that opens and closes a first outlet 47 to be described later, a top plate 44 that defines the ceiling of the container 40, a first banknote sensor 45 that detects the banknote B in the container 40, And a second banknote sensor 46 that detects a banknote B having a predetermined height in the container 40.
 容器40は、紙幣Bの搬送方向における前側の前壁部40aが搬送方向において前後に移動可能に構成されている。前壁部40aの位置は、結束対象に設定された紙幣Bの短手方向寸法に応じて調整される。具体的には、容器40内に搬入される紙幣Bが前壁部40aに当たって、そのまま容器40の底に落下していき、最終的に紙幣Bが前壁部40aに当接した状態で集積される位置に前壁部40aが配置される。また、前壁部40aは、上下に開閉するように構成されている。前壁部40aは、集積された紙幣Bを第2搬送部8により搬送する際に開いた状態となる。 The container 40 is configured such that the front wall 40a on the front side in the conveyance direction of the bills B can be moved back and forth in the conveyance direction. The position of the front wall 40a is adjusted according to the short direction dimension of the banknote B set as a binding target. Specifically, the banknote B carried into the container 40 hits the front wall portion 40a and falls to the bottom of the container 40 as it is, and is finally accumulated with the banknote B in contact with the front wall portion 40a. The front wall portion 40a is disposed at a position where The front wall 40a is configured to open and close up and down. The front wall portion 40 a is in an open state when the stacked banknotes B are conveyed by the second conveyance unit 8.
 ステージ41は、上下に移動可能に構成されている。例えば、ステージ41は、紙幣Bの集積量に応じて上下に移動する。 The stage 41 is configured to be movable up and down. For example, the stage 41 moves up and down according to the accumulation amount of the bills B.
 容器40は、筐体12の第2側面124に開口している。つまり、第2側面124には、図1に示すように、結束スタッカ4に集積された紙幣Bを筐体12の外部に取り出すための第1取出口47が設けられている。 The container 40 is opened on the second side surface 124 of the housing 12. That is, as shown in FIG. 1, the second side surface 124 is provided with a first outlet 47 for taking out the bills B accumulated in the bundling stacker 4 to the outside of the housing 12.
 扉43は、結束スタッカ4ごとに個別に設けられている。扉43は、第1取出口47を開放する開状態と第1取出口47を閉鎖する閉状態との間で所定の回転軸回りに回動自在に構成され、手動で開閉される。扉43は、外部から内部を目視可能な材料で構成されている。例えば、扉43は、透明又は半透明な材料(例えば、ガラスや樹脂)で構成されている。 The door 43 is provided for each binding stacker 4 individually. The door 43 is configured to be rotatable about a predetermined rotation axis between an open state in which the first outlet 47 is opened and a closed state in which the first outlet 47 is closed, and is manually opened and closed. The door 43 is made of a material that allows the inside to be visually observed from the outside. For example, the door 43 is made of a transparent or translucent material (for example, glass or resin).
 羽根車42は、可撓性を有する複数の羽を有しており、容器40内に落下する紙幣Bの、搬送方向後側の端部を叩いて、紙幣Bの落下を促進させる役割を有している。紙幣Bが容器40内に連続的に搬入される場合であっても、後の紙幣Bが先の紙幣Bの後端部に入り込むことを防止し、紙幣Bを1枚ずつ順に上方に積み重ねていくことができる。 The impeller 42 has a plurality of flexible wings, and has a role of accelerating the falling of the banknote B by hitting the end of the banknote B falling in the container 40 on the rear side in the transport direction. is doing. Even when the banknotes B are continuously carried into the container 40, the subsequent banknotes B are prevented from entering the rear end of the preceding banknotes B, and the banknotes B are stacked one by one in order. I can go.
 第1紙幣センサ45は、1つの結束スタッカ4につき複数設けられている。本実施形態では、容器40内において紙幣Bの搬送方向における異なる位置に2つの第1紙幣センサ45,45が設けられている。第1紙幣センサ45は、紙幣センサ25と同様の構成をしている。各第1紙幣センサ45は、容器40内の紙幣Bの集積方向に光を送信するように配置されている。つまり、第1紙幣センサ45は、光が遮断されることによって、容器40内に紙幣Bが存在することを検知することができる。また、搬送方向の異なる位置に2つの第1紙幣センサ45,45を設けることによって、容器40内において搬送方向における紙幣Bの位置にばらつきがあったとしても、何れかの第1紙幣センサ45により紙幣Bの存在を検知することができる。尚、第1紙幣センサ45は、紙幣Bの搬送方向及び紙幣Bの厚み方向の両方に直交する方向(図2における紙面奥行き方向)における異なる位置に複数設けられていてもよい。 A plurality of first banknote sensors 45 are provided for each binding stacker 4. In the present embodiment, two first banknote sensors 45 and 45 are provided at different positions in the conveyance direction of the banknote B in the container 40. The first banknote sensor 45 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25. Each first banknote sensor 45 is arranged to transmit light in the stacking direction of banknotes B in the container 40. That is, the 1st banknote sensor 45 can detect that the banknote B exists in the container 40 by light being interrupted | blocked. Moreover, even if there is variation in the position of the bill B in the transport direction in the container 40 by providing the two first bill sensors 45, 45 at different positions in the transport direction, any one of the first bill sensors 45 The presence of the banknote B can be detected. In addition, the 1st banknote sensor 45 may be provided with two or more in the different position in the direction (paper surface depth direction in FIG. 2) orthogonal to both the conveyance direction of the banknote B, and the thickness direction of the banknote B. As shown in FIG.
 第2紙幣センサ46は、容器40内において所定の高さに位置する紙幣Bを検知するように構成されている。第2紙幣センサ46は、紙幣センサ25と同様の構成をしている。第2紙幣センサ46は、前記所定の高さよりも高い位置に紙幣Bが存在するときには、送信部から受信部に向かう光が該紙幣Bにより遮断される一方、紙幣Bが前記所定の高さよりも高い位置に存在しないときには、送信部からの光が受信部に到達するように配置されている。 The second banknote sensor 46 is configured to detect the banknote B located at a predetermined height in the container 40. The second banknote sensor 46 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25. When the banknote B is present at a position higher than the predetermined height, the second banknote sensor 46 blocks light from the transmitting section toward the receiving section by the banknote B, while the banknote B is higher than the predetermined height. When the light does not exist at a high position, the light from the transmission unit is arranged to reach the reception unit.
 〈非結束スタッカ5の詳細構成〉
 第1非結束スタッカ5Aと第2非結束スタッカ5Bとは同じ構成であるので、以下では、両者を区別することなく、非結束スタッカ5として説明する。
<Detailed configuration of non-bundling stacker 5>
Since the first non-bundling stacker 5A and the second non-bundling stacker 5B have the same configuration, the following description will be made as the non-bundling stacker 5 without distinguishing between them.
 非結束スタッカ5は、紙幣を積み重ねて集積する。非結束スタッカ5は、図2に示すように、紙幣を集積する容器50と、搬送されてきた紙幣を容器50内へ搬入する羽根車51と、紙幣の有無を検知する集積センサ52とを有している。 The non-bundling stacker 5 stacks and stacks banknotes. As shown in FIG. 2, the non-bundling stacker 5 has a container 50 for collecting banknotes, an impeller 51 for carrying the conveyed banknotes into the container 50, and an accumulation sensor 52 for detecting the presence or absence of banknotes. is doing.
 非結束スタッカ5の容器50の底部は、傾斜している。これにより、容器50へ搬入された紙幣は、底部の低い方の端部へ集まる。 The bottom of the container 50 of the non-bundling stacker 5 is inclined. Thereby, the banknotes carried into the container 50 are collected at the lower end of the bottom.
 集積センサ52は、容器50の底部の低い方の端部に設けられている。集積センサ52は、紙幣センサ25と同様の構成をしており、光が遮断されることによって容器50内の紙幣を検知する。集積センサ52は、容器50内の紙幣により光が遮断されるように配置されている。 The integrated sensor 52 is provided at the lower end of the bottom of the container 50. The integrated sensor 52 has the same configuration as that of the banknote sensor 25, and detects banknotes in the container 50 by blocking light. The integrated sensor 52 is arranged so that light is blocked by the banknotes in the container 50.
 羽根車51は、複数の羽を有しており、搬送されてきた紙幣を羽の間で保持して、容器50内へ搬入する。紙幣は、容器50の底部近傍において羽根車51の羽から離脱し、容器50内に集積される。 The impeller 51 has a plurality of wings, holds the conveyed banknote between the wings, and carries it into the container 50. The banknotes are separated from the wings of the impeller 51 near the bottom of the container 50 and accumulated in the container 50.
 容器50は、筐体12の第2側面124に開口している。すなわち、第2側面124には、非結束スタッカ5に集積された紙幣を筐体12の外部に取り出すための第2取出口53が設けられている。第2取出口53には、扉が設けられておらず、開放されている。第1非結束スタッカ5Aの第2取出口53と第2非結束スタッカ5Bの第2取出口53とは、第2側面124において水平方向に並んで開口している。 The container 50 is open on the second side surface 124 of the housing 12. That is, the second side surface 124 is provided with a second outlet 53 for taking out the banknotes accumulated in the non-binding stacker 5 to the outside of the housing 12. The second outlet 53 is not provided with a door and is open. The second outlet 53 of the first non-bundling stacker 5A and the second outlet 53 of the second non-bundling stacker 5B are opened side by side in the horizontal direction on the second side surface 124.
 また、非結束スタッカ5には、集積された紙幣を第2取出口53の方へ押し出すための押出機構54が設けられている。押出機構54は、容器50の奥側(第2取出口53と反対側)に設けられており、奥側から手前側(第2取出口53の側)に紙幣を押し出すように構成されている。 Further, the non-binding stacker 5 is provided with an extruding mechanism 54 for extruding the accumulated banknotes toward the second outlet 53. The push-out mechanism 54 is provided on the back side (the side opposite to the second outlet 53) of the container 50, and is configured to push out banknotes from the back side to the front side (the second outlet 53 side). .
 〈リジェクトスタッカ6の詳細構成〉
 リジェクトスタッカ6は、紙幣を積み重ねて集積する。リジェクトスタッカ6は、図2に示すように、紙幣を集積する容器60と、搬送されてきた紙幣を容器60内へ搬入する羽根車61と、紙幣の有無を検知する集積センサ62と、容器60内の紙幣が外部へ排出されることを防止するストッパ64,64とを有している。
<Detailed configuration of reject stacker 6>
The reject stacker 6 stacks and stacks banknotes. As shown in FIG. 2, the reject stacker 6 includes a container 60 that accumulates banknotes, an impeller 61 that carries the conveyed banknotes into the container 60, an accumulation sensor 62 that detects the presence or absence of banknotes, and a container 60. It has stoppers 64 and 64 for preventing the banknotes from being discharged outside.
 詳しくは、リジェクトスタッカ6の容器60は、筐体12の第1側面123に開口している。すなわち、第1側面123には、リジェクトスタッカ6に集積された紙幣を筐体12の外部に取り出すためのリジェクト取出口63が設けられている。リジェクト取出口63は、第1側面123において、取込口24の上方に開口している。リジェクト取出口63には、扉が設けられておらず、開放されている。 Specifically, the container 60 of the reject stacker 6 is open to the first side surface 123 of the housing 12. That is, the first side surface 123 is provided with a reject outlet 63 for taking out the banknotes accumulated in the reject stacker 6 to the outside of the housing 12. The reject outlet 63 opens above the inlet 24 on the first side surface 123. The reject outlet 63 is not provided with a door and is open.
 容器60の底部は、第1側面123から離れるに従って下方に位置するように傾斜している。そのため、容器60内の紙幣は、第1側面123から内側へ入り込んだ位置に集積されていく。これにより、容器60内に搬入された紙幣が、そのまま第1側面123のリジェクト取出口63から外部へ排出されることを防止することができる。 The bottom of the container 60 is inclined so as to be positioned downward as the distance from the first side surface 123 increases. Therefore, the banknotes in the container 60 are accumulated at a position where they enter from the first side surface 123 to the inside. Thereby, it can prevent that the banknote carried in in the container 60 is discharged | emitted from the rejection outlet 63 of the 1st side surface 123 as it is outside.
 さらに、2つのストッパ64,64は、容器60の底部のうち、第1側面123側の端縁に設けられている。ストッパ64は、底部の第1側面123側の端縁と平行に延びる軸回りに回動自在に支持されると共に、付勢バネ(図示省略)で付勢されて、容器60の底部に対して立ち上がった状態となっている。これらストッパ64,64によっても、容器60内の紙幣が第1側面123のリジェクト取出口63から外部へ排出されることを防止することができる。尚、リジェクトスタッカ6に集積された紙幣をリジェクト取出口63から抜き出すときには、ストッパ64,64を付勢バネの弾性力に抗して倒すことによって、紙幣を抜き出すことができる。 Furthermore, the two stoppers 64, 64 are provided at the edge of the bottom of the container 60 on the first side surface 123 side. The stopper 64 is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in parallel with the edge of the bottom portion on the first side surface 123 side, and is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) so as to be against the bottom of the container 60. Standing up. These stoppers 64, 64 can also prevent the banknotes in the container 60 from being discharged from the reject outlet 63 on the first side surface 123 to the outside. Note that when the banknotes accumulated in the reject stacker 6 are extracted from the reject outlet 63, the banknotes can be extracted by depressing the stoppers 64 and 64 against the elastic force of the biasing spring.
 羽根車61は、可撓性を有する複数の羽を有しており、容器60内に落下する紙幣の、搬送方向後側の端部を叩き落とす役割を有している。紙幣が容器60内に連続的に搬入される場合であっても、後の紙幣が先の紙幣の後端部に入り込むことを防止し、紙幣を1枚ずつ順に上方に積み重ねていくことができる。 The impeller 61 has a plurality of flexible wings, and has a role of knocking down the end of the banknote falling in the container 60 on the rear side in the transport direction. Even when banknotes are continuously carried into the container 60, it is possible to prevent subsequent banknotes from entering the rear end of the previous banknote and stack the banknotes one by one in order. .
 集積センサ62は、紙幣センサ25と同様の構成をしており、光が遮断されることによって容器60内の紙幣を検知する。集積センサ62は、容器60内の紙幣により光が遮断されるように配置されている。 The integrated sensor 62 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25, and detects the banknote in the container 60 when light is blocked. The integrated sensor 62 is arranged so that light is blocked by the banknotes in the container 60.
 〈結束部9の詳細構成〉
 結束部9は、図3に示すように、テープTを供給するテープ供給部91と、テープTでテープ輪Lを作成するテープ輪作成部92と、第2搬送部8によってテープ輪Lの中へ搬送された紙幣Bを一時的に把持する一時把持部93(図6,7参照)と、紙幣Bを前記テープTで結束するときに該紙幣Bを集積方向に押圧するクランプ部94と、テープTを紙幣Bに巻き付けた状態でテープT同士を接合するヒータ95と、テープTを紙幣Bに巻き付けられていない位置で切断するカッタ96と、テープTに印字する印字部97と、テープTに押印する押印部98とを有している。
<Detailed configuration of the binding unit 9>
As shown in FIG. 3, the bundling unit 9 includes a tape supply unit 91 that supplies the tape T, a tape ring creation unit 92 that creates the tape ring L using the tape T, A temporary gripping portion 93 (see FIGS. 6 and 7) for temporarily gripping the bill B conveyed to the tape, a clamp portion 94 for pressing the bill B in the stacking direction when the bill B is bound with the tape T, A heater 95 that joins the tapes T with the tape T wrapped around the banknote B, a cutter 96 that cuts the tape T at a position where the tape T is not wrapped around the banknote B, a printing unit 97 that prints on the tape T, and a tape T And a stamping portion 98 for stamping.
 テープ供給部91は、テープTがリールに巻き付けられたテープリール911と、テープリール911から引き出されるテープTを搬送するテープ搬送部912とを有している。テープ搬送部912は、テープTを所定の搬送経路に沿って搬送する。テープ搬送部912は、ガイド(図示省略)と複数のローラ対とを有している。 The tape supply unit 91 includes a tape reel 911 around which the tape T is wound and a tape transport unit 912 that transports the tape T drawn from the tape reel 911. The tape transport unit 912 transports the tape T along a predetermined transport path. The tape transport unit 912 has a guide (not shown) and a plurality of roller pairs.
 テープ輪作成部92は、テープTでテープ輪Lを作成し、集積された紙幣Bが該テープ輪Lの中に配置された後に該テープTを引き戻して該テープTを該紙幣Bに巻き付ける。テープ輪作成部92は、テープTの送り出し及び引き戻しを行う送り出しローラ対920と、テープTの先端部を把持するテープ把持部921と、テープTでテープ輪Lを作成する際にテープ輪Lの形状を規定するガイド部925と、テープTの先端を検知する第1テープセンサ9210と、大テープ輪L2が作成されたことを検知する第2テープセンサ9211とを有している。テープ輪作成部92は、テープ把持部921によりテープTで小テープ輪L1を作成した後、送り出しローラ対920によりテープTを送り出すことによって該小テープ輪L1を大きくして大テープ輪L2を作成する。その際、ガイド部925は、テープTを案内して、大テープ輪L2の形を規定し、第2テープセンサ9211は、大テープ輪L2の形成を検知する。 The tape ring creating unit 92 creates a tape ring L with the tape T, and after the accumulated banknotes B are arranged in the tape ring L, the tape T is pulled back and the tape T is wound around the banknotes B. The tape ring creating unit 92 includes a feed roller pair 920 that feeds and retracts the tape T, a tape gripping unit 921 that grips the leading end of the tape T, and the tape ring L when the tape T is created with the tape T. It has a guide portion 925 that defines the shape, a first tape sensor 9210 that detects the tip of the tape T, and a second tape sensor 9211 that detects that the large tape ring L2 has been created. The tape ring creating unit 92 creates the small tape ring L1 with the tape T by the tape gripping unit 921, and then feeds the tape T by the feed roller pair 920 to enlarge the small tape ring L1 to create the large tape ring L2. To do. At that time, the guide portion 925 guides the tape T to define the shape of the large tape ring L2, and the second tape sensor 9211 detects the formation of the large tape ring L2.
 送り出しローラ対920は、ステッピングモータにより駆動され、テープ輪Lを作成する際にテープTを送り出す一方、紙幣Bがテープ輪Lの中へ配置された後はテープTを紙幣Bに巻き付けるべくテープTを引き戻す。送り出しローラ対920は、テープ搬送部912の下流端部に位置し、テープ搬送部912の一部も構成する。送り出しローラ対920は、送り出し部の一例である。尚、テープ搬送部912のローラ対も、送り出しローラ対920のモータによりベルト及びギア等を介して駆動される。 The feed roller pair 920 is driven by a stepping motor to feed the tape T when the tape ring L is created. On the other hand, after the bill B is placed in the tape ring L, the tape T is wound around the bill B. Pull back. The feed roller pair 920 is located at the downstream end of the tape transport unit 912 and also constitutes a part of the tape transport unit 912. The delivery roller pair 920 is an example of a delivery unit. The roller pair of the tape transport unit 912 is also driven by a motor of the feed roller pair 920 via a belt, a gear, and the like.
 第1テープセンサ9210は、テープTの搬送路中であって、送り出しローラ対920とテープ把持部921との間に設けられている。第1テープセンサ9210は、紙幣センサ25と同様の構成をしている。第1テープセンサ9210は、光が遮断されることによってテープTを検知する。例えば、送り出しローラ対920がテープTを引き戻し、第1テープセンサ9210において光が遮断された状態から光が受信される状態となったことをもってテープTの先端を検知することができる。 The first tape sensor 9210 is provided in the transport path of the tape T and is provided between the feed roller pair 920 and the tape grip portion 921. The first tape sensor 9210 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25. The first tape sensor 9210 detects the tape T when light is blocked. For example, the leading end of the tape T can be detected when the pair of delivery rollers 920 pulls back the tape T and the first tape sensor 9210 is in a state where light is received from a state where the light is blocked.
 テープ把持部921は、送り出しローラ対920から送り出されるテープTを受け取ることが可能な位置に配置されている。テープ把持部921は、テープTを把持可能に且つ、テープTを把持した状態で回転可能に構成されている。テープ把持部921は、送り出しローラ対920から送り出されたテープTの先端部を把持した状態で回転することによってテープ輪Lを作成する。 The tape gripping portion 921 is disposed at a position where the tape T fed from the feed roller pair 920 can be received. The tape gripping portion 921 is configured to be able to grip the tape T and to be rotatable while gripping the tape T. The tape gripping portion 921 creates a tape loop L by rotating in a state where the tip end portion of the tape T fed from the feed roller pair 920 is gripped.
 図4に、テープ把持部921の斜視図を示す。図4(A)は、テープ把持部921の閉状態を示し、図4(B)は、テープ把持部921の開状態を示す。詳しくは、テープ把持部921は、ベース部922と、可動部923と、回転シャフト924とを有している。ベース部922は、平板状のベース板922aと、ベース板922aに一体的に設けられたベースブロック922bとを有している。ベース板922aには、互いに平行に延びる第1及び第2凹溝922c,922dが形成されている。第1及び第2凹溝922c,922dは、テープ幅方向に延びている。ベースブロック922bには、回転シャフト924が回転自在に挿通されている。回転シャフト924は、テープ幅方向に延びており、モモータにより回転駆動される。可動部923は、ベース板922aと対向して配置されると共に、回転シャフト924の先端に回転シャフト924に対して回転不能に固定されている。可動部923は、回転シャフト924を介して回転駆動される。可動部923は、回転シャフト924の先端に取り付けられる取付部923aと、取付部923aのうち回転シャフト924から偏心した位置に設けられ、回転シャフト924と平行(即ち、テープ幅方向)に延びる押え部923bと、押え部923bの両端に設けられた第1及び第2ガイド部923c,923dとを有している。第1ガイド部923cは、取付板923aとの間にガイド溝923eを形成している。 FIG. 4 shows a perspective view of the tape gripping portion 921. 4A shows a closed state of the tape gripping portion 921, and FIG. 4B shows an open state of the tape gripping portion 921. Specifically, the tape gripping portion 921 has a base portion 922, a movable portion 923, and a rotating shaft 924. The base portion 922 includes a flat base plate 922a and a base block 922b provided integrally with the base plate 922a. The base plate 922a is formed with first and second concave grooves 922c and 922d extending in parallel with each other. The first and second concave grooves 922c and 922d extend in the tape width direction. A rotation shaft 924 is rotatably inserted into the base block 922b. The rotating shaft 924 extends in the tape width direction and is driven to rotate by a motor. The movable portion 923 is disposed so as to face the base plate 922 a and is fixed to the distal end of the rotation shaft 924 so as not to rotate with respect to the rotation shaft 924. The movable part 923 is rotationally driven via a rotary shaft 924. The movable portion 923 is provided with an attachment portion 923a attached to the distal end of the rotation shaft 924, and a pressing portion provided at a position eccentric from the rotation shaft 924 in the attachment portion 923a and extending in parallel with the rotation shaft 924 (that is, in the tape width direction). 923b and first and second guide portions 923c and 923d provided at both ends of the presser portion 923b. A guide groove 923e is formed between the first guide portion 923c and the mounting plate 923a.
 回転シャフト924がその軸回りの一方側に回転すると、可動部923は、図4(A)に示すようにベース板922aと重なり合った状態となる。この状態をテープ把持部921の閉状態と称する。一方、回転シャフト924がその軸回りの他方側に回転すると、可動部923は、図4(B)に示すようにベース板922aとの間に隙間が形成された状態となる。この状態をテープ把持部921の開状態と称する。テープ把持部921が開状態のときに、可動部923とベース板922aとの間にテープTが挿入可能となる。その後、テープ把持部921を閉状態とすることによって、可動部923とベース板922aとの間でテープTを把持する。可動部923は、ベース板922aと重なり合った状態、即ち、閉状態でベース部922に対してロック可能に構成されている。可動部923がロックされると、可動部923とベース部922とは相対回転が不能となり、可動部923とベース板922aとが重なり合った状態が維持される。可動部923がロックされた状態で回転シャフト924が回転すると、テープ把持部921は、ベース板922aと可動部923とでテープTを挟持した状態で回転シャフト924回りに回転する。 When the rotating shaft 924 rotates to one side around the axis, the movable portion 923 is in a state of overlapping with the base plate 922a as shown in FIG. This state is referred to as a closed state of the tape grip portion 921. On the other hand, when the rotary shaft 924 rotates to the other side around the axis, the movable portion 923 is in a state where a gap is formed between the movable portion 923 and the base plate 922a as shown in FIG. This state is referred to as an open state of the tape gripping portion 921. When the tape gripping portion 921 is in the open state, the tape T can be inserted between the movable portion 923 and the base plate 922a. Then, the tape T is gripped between the movable portion 923 and the base plate 922a by closing the tape gripping portion 921. The movable portion 923 is configured to be lockable with respect to the base portion 922 in a state where the movable portion 923 overlaps with the base plate 922a, that is, in a closed state. When the movable portion 923 is locked, the movable portion 923 and the base portion 922 cannot be rotated relative to each other, and the state where the movable portion 923 and the base plate 922a overlap with each other is maintained. When the rotary shaft 924 rotates with the movable portion 923 locked, the tape gripping portion 921 rotates around the rotary shaft 924 with the tape T sandwiched between the base plate 922a and the movable portion 923.
 テープ把持部921の閉状態において、可動部923の押え部923bは、ベース板922aのうち第2凹溝922dに隣接する部分と重なり合っている。つまり、第2凹溝922dは、押え部923bに隣接する位置において露出している。このとき、第1及び第2ガイド部923c、923dは、ベース板922aに直交する方向へ延びている。同様に、ガイド溝923eも、ベース板922aに直交する方向へ延びている。 In the closed state of the tape gripping portion 921, the pressing portion 923b of the movable portion 923 overlaps with a portion of the base plate 922a adjacent to the second concave groove 922d. That is, the second concave groove 922d is exposed at a position adjacent to the pressing portion 923b. At this time, the first and second guide portions 923c and 923d extend in a direction orthogonal to the base plate 922a. Similarly, the guide groove 923e extends in a direction orthogonal to the base plate 922a.
 ガイド部925は、大テープ輪L2を作成するときに、該大テープ輪L2の外周面に接触して該大テープ輪L2の形状を規定する。ガイド部925は、大テープ輪L2を略長方形状、詳しくは、角部が湾曲した長方形状に規定する。 The guide portion 925 defines the shape of the large tape ring L2 by making contact with the outer peripheral surface of the large tape ring L2 when creating the large tape ring L2. The guide part 925 defines the large tape ring L2 in a substantially rectangular shape, specifically, a rectangular shape with curved corners.
 図5に、テープ輪作成部92の斜視図を示す。ガイド部925は、大テープ輪L2の下側から大テープ輪L2の外周面に接触する下ガイド部926と、水平方向から大テープ輪L2の外周面に接触する第1側方ガイド部927及び第2側方ガイド部928と、長方形の4つの角部に対応する4つの第1~第4コーナーガイド部929a~929dとを有している。 FIG. 5 shows a perspective view of the tape loop creating unit 92. The guide portion 925 includes a lower guide portion 926 that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the large tape ring L2 from the lower side of the large tape ring L2, a first side guide portion 927 that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the large tape ring L2 from the horizontal direction, and It has a second side guide portion 928 and four first to fourth corner guide portions 929a to 929d corresponding to the four corner portions of the rectangle.
 図6に、テープ輪作成部92の下部を斜め上方から見た斜視図を示す。下ガイド部926は、テープTの幅方向の位置を規制する一対の側壁926a,926aと底壁926bとを有し、溝状に形成されている。底壁926bの幅は、テープ幅よりも広い。一対の側壁926a,926aは、底壁926bから開口端に向かって(即ち、上方へ向かって)溝幅が広くなるように傾斜している。底壁926bには、テープTの摺動性を向上させる複数のローラ926c,926c,…が設けられている。底壁926bには、後述する押印部98のスタンプ981が貫通する貫通孔926dが設けられている。 FIG. 6 shows a perspective view of the lower part of the tape ring creating section 92 as viewed from obliquely above. The lower guide portion 926 has a pair of side walls 926a, 926a and a bottom wall 926b that regulate the position of the tape T in the width direction, and is formed in a groove shape. The width of the bottom wall 926b is wider than the tape width. The pair of side walls 926a and 926a are inclined so that the groove width increases from the bottom wall 926b toward the opening end (that is, upward). A plurality of rollers 926c, 926c,... For improving the slidability of the tape T are provided on the bottom wall 926b. The bottom wall 926b is provided with a through hole 926d through which a stamp 981 of a stamping portion 98 described later passes.
 底壁926bの長手方向両端部には、第1コーナーガイド部929a及び第2コーナーガイド部929bが設けられている。第1コーナーガイド部929aは、下ガイド部926と第1側方ガイド部927とで形成される角部に位置するテープTを湾曲させる。第2コーナーガイド部929bは、下ガイド部926と第2側方ガイド部928(図6では図示省略)とで形成される角部に位置するテープTを湾曲させる。第1コーナーガイド部929a及び第2コーナーガイド部929bはそれぞれ、2枚の板で構成されている。2枚の板はそれぞれ、凹状に湾曲する端縁を有し、互いに対向する状態で底壁926bに立設されている。 1st corner guide part 929a and 2nd corner guide part 929b are provided in the longitudinal direction both ends of bottom wall 926b. The first corner guide portion 929a bends the tape T located at the corner formed by the lower guide portion 926 and the first side guide portion 927. The second corner guide part 929b bends the tape T located at the corner formed by the lower guide part 926 and the second side guide part 928 (not shown in FIG. 6). Each of the first corner guide portion 929a and the second corner guide portion 929b is composed of two plates. Each of the two plates has an edge that curves in a concave shape, and is erected on the bottom wall 926b so as to face each other.
 下ガイド部926には、該下ガイド部926上に落下したテープTを検知する第3テープセンサ926eが設けられている。詳しくは、第3テープセンサ926eは、紙幣センサ25と同様の構成をしており、送信部から出射されて受信部に到達する光が遮断されることによってテープTを検知する。第3テープセンサ926eの送信部及び受信部のそれぞれは、底壁926bの長手方向両端部に設けられている。送信部は、底壁926bの上方において底壁926bの長手方向に沿って光を出射している。第3テープセンサ926eは、落下検知センサの一例である。 The lower guide portion 926 is provided with a third tape sensor 926e that detects the tape T dropped on the lower guide portion 926. Specifically, the third tape sensor 926e has the same configuration as that of the banknote sensor 25, and detects the tape T by blocking the light emitted from the transmission unit and reaching the reception unit. Each of the transmission unit and the reception unit of the third tape sensor 926e is provided at both longitudinal ends of the bottom wall 926b. The transmitter emits light along the longitudinal direction of the bottom wall 926b above the bottom wall 926b. The third tape sensor 926e is an example of a drop detection sensor.
 下ガイド部926は、移動機構が設けられており、移動機構によって上下に移動可能に構成されている。この移動機構は、後述する下クランプ部943,944の移動機構と共通である。移動機構は、モータと、モータに回転駆動される円盤と、下ガイド部926を上下に移動可能に支持する支持部と、円盤と下ガイド部926とを連結するリンクとを有している。円盤には、カム溝が形成されている。リンクは、カム溝の形状に応じて、円盤の回転を下ガイド部926に伝達する。下ガイド部926は、円盤が回転駆動されると、カム溝の形状に応じて上下動する。 The lower guide portion 926 is provided with a moving mechanism, and is configured to be movable up and down by the moving mechanism. This moving mechanism is common to the moving mechanism of lower clamp parts 943 and 944 described later. The moving mechanism includes a motor, a disk that is rotationally driven by the motor, a support part that supports the lower guide part 926 to be movable up and down, and a link that connects the disk and the lower guide part 926. A cam groove is formed in the disk. The link transmits the rotation of the disk to the lower guide portion 926 according to the shape of the cam groove. When the disk is driven to rotate, the lower guide portion 926 moves up and down according to the shape of the cam groove.
 第1側方ガイド部927は、図5に示すように、下ガイド部926の長手方向の結束スタッカ4側の端部において上下方向に延びている。第1側方ガイド部927は、側壁927aと底壁927bとを有し、溝状に形成されている。側壁927aは、テープTの幅方向の位置を規制する。底壁927bの幅は、テープ幅よりも広い。底壁927bには、第1コーナーガイド部929aが通過する2本のスリットが形成されている。 As shown in FIG. 5, the first side guide portion 927 extends in the vertical direction at the end of the lower guide portion 926 on the binding stacker 4 side in the longitudinal direction. The 1st side guide part 927 has the side wall 927a and the bottom wall 927b, and is formed in groove shape. The side wall 927a regulates the position of the tape T in the width direction. The width of the bottom wall 927b is wider than the tape width. Two slits through which the first corner guide portion 929a passes are formed in the bottom wall 927b.
 第2側方ガイド部928は、下ガイド部926の長手方向の投出部11側の端部において上下方向に延びている。第2側方ガイド部928は、略平板状に形成され、第1側方ガイド部927の側壁927aに相当する部分が設けられていない。第2側方ガイド部928は、支持部によって上下に移動可能に支持されると共に、リンクを介して下ガイド部926に連結されている。これにより、第2側方ガイド部928は、下ガイド部926の上昇に連動して上昇し、下ガイド部926の下降に連動して下降する。尚、第2側方ガイド部928の移動量は、リンクにより増幅されている。第2側方ガイド部928は、結束紙幣Bを搬送するときに、該結束紙幣Bの搬送を阻害しないように上方へ退避するように構成されている。 2nd side guide part 928 is extended in the up-down direction in the edge part by the side of the projection part 11 of the longitudinal direction of the lower guide part 926. As shown in FIG. The second side guide portion 928 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and a portion corresponding to the side wall 927a of the first side guide portion 927 is not provided. The second side guide portion 928 is supported by the support portion so as to be vertically movable, and is connected to the lower guide portion 926 via a link. As a result, the second side guide portion 928 rises in conjunction with the rise of the lower guide portion 926 and descends in conjunction with the fall of the lower guide portion 926. Note that the amount of movement of the second side guide portion 928 is amplified by the link. The second side guide portion 928 is configured to retract upward so as not to hinder the conveyance of the bundled banknote B when the bundled banknote B is conveyed.
 また、第1コーナーガイド部929a及び第2コーナーガイド部929bの上方であって、テープ把持部921と略同じ高さには、第3コーナーガイド部929c及び第4コーナーガイド部929dが設けられている。第3コーナーガイド部929cは、第1側方ガイド部927に隣接して設けられている。第3コーナーガイド部929cは、2枚の板を有している。2枚の板は、凹状に湾曲する端縁を有し、互いに対向する状態で底壁927bに立設されている。第4コーナーガイド部929dは、第2側方ガイド部928に隣接して設けられている。第4コーナーガイド部929dは、凹状に湾曲した湾曲面を有するブロックで形成されている。以下、第1~第4コーナーガイド部929a~929dを特に区別しないときには、単にコーナーガイド部929と称する場合がある。 In addition, a third corner guide portion 929c and a fourth corner guide portion 929d are provided above the first corner guide portion 929a and the second corner guide portion 929b and at substantially the same height as the tape grip portion 921. Yes. The third corner guide part 929c is provided adjacent to the first side guide part 927. The third corner guide portion 929c has two plates. The two plates have end edges that curve in a concave shape, and stand on the bottom wall 927b so as to face each other. The fourth corner guide portion 929d is provided adjacent to the second side guide portion 928. The fourth corner guide portion 929d is formed of a block having a curved surface that is curved in a concave shape. Hereinafter, when the first to fourth corner guide portions 929a to 929d are not particularly distinguished, they may be simply referred to as corner guide portions 929.
 第2テープセンサ9211は、紙幣センサ25と同様の構成をし、光が遮断されることによってテープTを検知する。第2テープセンサ9211の受信部は、図5に示すように、第4コーナーガイド部929dに取り付けられている。第2テープセンサ9211の送信部は、該送信部からの光が第4コーナーガイド部929dに案内されているテープTによって遮断される位置に配置されている。つまり、第2テープセンサ9211は、送信部が光を送信しても受信部が光を受信しないことをもって、第4コーナーガイド部929dがテープTを案内していること、即ち、テープ輪Lが所定の大きさになったことを検知する。第2テープセンサ9211は、テープ輪検知センサの一例である。 The second tape sensor 9211 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25 and detects the tape T when light is blocked. The receiving part of the second tape sensor 9211 is attached to the fourth corner guide part 929d as shown in FIG. The transmission unit of the second tape sensor 9211 is disposed at a position where light from the transmission unit is blocked by the tape T guided by the fourth corner guide unit 929d. In other words, the second tape sensor 9211 is configured such that the fourth corner guide portion 929d guides the tape T when the transmitting portion transmits light and the receiving portion does not receive light. Detects that it has reached a predetermined size. The second tape sensor 9211 is an example of a tape ring detection sensor.
 一時把持部93は、第2搬送部8によってテープ輪Lの中へ搬送された紙幣Bを一時的に把持する。一時把持部93は、第2水平方向、即ち、テープ幅方向においてテープ輪Lに対して第2搬送部8とは反対側に設けられている。一時把持部93は、紙幣Bのうち、テープ輪Lに対して第2搬送部8とは反対側の部分を把持する。一時把持部93は、上把持部931と、下把持部932と、上把持部931及び下把持部932を上下方向へ移動させる上下移動機構とを有する。一時把持部93は、上把持部931と下把持部932とで紙幣Bを把持する。 The temporary gripping part 93 temporarily grips the bill B transported into the tape loop L by the second transporting part 8. The temporary holding portion 93 is provided on the opposite side to the second conveying portion 8 with respect to the tape loop L in the second horizontal direction, that is, the tape width direction. The temporary gripping portion 93 grips a portion of the banknote B on the side opposite to the second transport portion 8 with respect to the tape loop L. The temporary gripping portion 93 includes an upper gripping portion 931, a lower gripping portion 932, and a vertical movement mechanism that moves the upper gripping portion 931 and the lower gripping portion 932 in the vertical direction. The temporary gripping portion 93 grips the bill B with the upper gripping portion 931 and the lower gripping portion 932.
 図7に、テープ輪作成部92の上部を斜め下方から見た斜視図を示す。上把持部931は、上ベースプレート933と、上可動プレート934と、上可動プレート934に設けられた第1及び第2当接部931a,931bとを有している。第1及び第2当接部931a,931bは、紙幣Bの短手方向に並んでいる。第1当接部931aと第2当接部931bとは、同じ高さに位置している。尚、第1当接部931aと第2当接部931bとの間には、テープ把持部921のベース板922aが配置されている。上可動プレート934は、テープTの幅方向へ移動可能な状態で上ベースプレート933に支持されている。 FIG. 7 shows a perspective view of the upper part of the tape ring creating section 92 as seen obliquely from below. The upper grip portion 931 includes an upper base plate 933, an upper movable plate 934, and first and second contact portions 931a and 931b provided on the upper movable plate 934. The first and second contact portions 931 a and 931 b are arranged in the short direction of the bill B. The 1st contact part 931a and the 2nd contact part 931b are located in the same height. A base plate 922a of the tape gripping portion 921 is disposed between the first contact portion 931a and the second contact portion 931b. The upper movable plate 934 is supported by the upper base plate 933 so as to be movable in the width direction of the tape T.
 下把持部932は、図6に示すように、下ベースプレート935と、下可動プレート936と、下可動プレート936に設けられた第1及び第2当接部932a,932bとを有している。第1及び第2当接部932a,932bは、紙幣Bの短手方向に並んでいる。第1当接部932aと第2当接部932bとは、同じ高さに位置している。第1及び第2当接部932a,932bはそれぞれ、上把持部931の第1及び第2当接部931a,931bと対向している。下可動プレート936は、テープTの幅方向へ移動可能な状態で下ベースプレート935に支持されている。 As shown in FIG. 6, the lower grip 932 includes a lower base plate 935, a lower movable plate 936, and first and second contact portions 932 a and 932 b provided on the lower movable plate 936. The first and second contact portions 932a and 932b are arranged in the short direction of the bill B. The first contact portion 932a and the second contact portion 932b are located at the same height. The first and second contact portions 932a and 932b are opposed to the first and second contact portions 931a and 931b of the upper grip portion 931, respectively. The lower movable plate 936 is supported by the lower base plate 935 so as to be movable in the width direction of the tape T.
 上下移動機構は、モータと、モータに回転駆動される円盤と、上ベースプレート933及び下ベースプレート935を上下に移動可能に支持する支持部と、円盤と上ベースプレート933及び下ベースプレート935をそれぞれ連結するリンクとを有している。円盤には、カム溝が形成されている。リンクは、カム溝の形状に応じて、円盤の回転を上ベースプレート933及び下ベースプレート935のそれぞれに伝達する。上ベースプレート933及び下ベースプレート935は、円盤が回転駆動されると、カム溝の形状に応じて上下動する。それにより、上把持部931及び下把持部932が互いに離反したり、互いに近接したりする。尚、上ベースプレート933用のカム溝と、下ベースプレート935用のカム溝とは形状が異なっている。そのため、上把持部931と下把持部932とは、それぞれ同じ量だけ上下動するのではなく、異なる態様で上下動する。 The vertical movement mechanism includes a motor, a disk that is rotationally driven by the motor, a support unit that supports the upper base plate 933 and the lower base plate 935 so as to be movable up and down, and a link that connects the disk, the upper base plate 933, and the lower base plate 935, respectively. And have. A cam groove is formed in the disk. The link transmits the rotation of the disk to each of the upper base plate 933 and the lower base plate 935 according to the shape of the cam groove. When the disk is driven to rotate, the upper base plate 933 and the lower base plate 935 move up and down according to the shape of the cam groove. Thereby, the upper grip portion 931 and the lower grip portion 932 are separated from each other or close to each other. The cam groove for the upper base plate 933 and the cam groove for the lower base plate 935 have different shapes. For this reason, the upper gripping portion 931 and the lower gripping portion 932 do not move up and down by the same amount, but move up and down in different modes.
 ここで、上可動プレート934及び下可動プレート936は、紙幣が大テープ輪L2の中へ搬送される際の第2搬送部8の動きに連動して第2水平方向へ移動するように構成されている。 Here, the upper movable plate 934 and the lower movable plate 936 are configured to move in the second horizontal direction in conjunction with the movement of the second transport unit 8 when the bill is transported into the large tape ring L2. ing.
 具体的には、上可動プレート934は、上ベースプレート933だけでなく、上下に延びるシャフトにも支持されている。同様に、下可動プレート936は、下ベースプレート935だけでなく、上下に延びるシャフトにも支持されている。これらのシャフトは上下方向に延びているので、上把持部931及び下把持部932が上下動する際には、上可動プレート934及び下可動プレート936は、シャフトに沿って上下動するので、シャフトが上把持部931及び下把持部932の上下動を阻害することはない。これら2本のシャフトは、フレームによって一体的に構成されている。該フレーム及びシャフトは、移動機構によって第2水平方向に移動可能に構成されている。該フレーム及びシャフトは、紙幣が大テープ輪L2の中へ搬送される際の第2搬送部8の動きに連動して、該移動機構によって第2水平方向へ移動する。詳しくは、第2搬送部8が紙幣を大テープ輪L2の中へ搬送すると、第2搬送部8の移動に連動して、移動機構が前記フレームを第2水平方向へ移動させる。該フレームが第2水平方向へ移動すると、該フレームのシャフトに支持された上可動プレート934及び下可動プレート936も第2水平方向へ移動する。 Specifically, the upper movable plate 934 is supported not only by the upper base plate 933 but also by a shaft extending vertically. Similarly, the lower movable plate 936 is supported not only by the lower base plate 935 but also by a shaft extending vertically. Since these shafts extend in the vertical direction, when the upper grip portion 931 and the lower grip portion 932 move up and down, the upper movable plate 934 and the lower movable plate 936 move up and down along the shaft. Does not hinder the vertical movement of the upper grip portion 931 and the lower grip portion 932. These two shafts are integrally formed by a frame. The frame and the shaft are configured to be movable in the second horizontal direction by a moving mechanism. The frame and the shaft are moved in the second horizontal direction by the moving mechanism in conjunction with the movement of the second conveying unit 8 when the bill is conveyed into the large tape ring L2. Specifically, when the second transport unit 8 transports the bill into the large tape loop L2, the moving mechanism moves the frame in the second horizontal direction in conjunction with the movement of the second transport unit 8. When the frame moves in the second horizontal direction, the upper movable plate 934 and the lower movable plate 936 supported by the shaft of the frame also move in the second horizontal direction.
 こうして、上把持部931の第1及び第2当接部931a,931b並びに下把持部932の第1及び第2当接部932a,932bは、第2搬送部8による紙幣の大テープ輪L2内への挿入量に応じて第2水平方向の位置が変更される。 Thus, the first and second contact portions 931a and 931b of the upper grip portion 931 and the first and second contact portions 932a and 932b of the lower grip portion 932 are within the large tape ring L2 of the bill by the second transport portion 8. The position in the second horizontal direction is changed according to the amount of insertion.
 クランプ部94は、紙幣Bを前記テープTで結束するときに該紙幣Bを集積方向に押圧する。クランプ部94は、紙幣Bのうち、テープTで結束される結束予定部分の近傍部分を押圧する。クランプ部94は、図6,7に示すように、テープ輪Lの中へ搬送された紙幣Bの上方に設けられた一対の上クランプ部941,942と、該紙幣Bの下方に設けられた一対の下クランプ部943,944と、一方の上クランプ部942及び下クランプ部943,944を上下に移動させる移動機構とを有している。 The clamp part 94 presses the banknote B in the stacking direction when binding the banknote B with the tape T. The clamp portion 94 presses a portion in the vicinity of the portion to be bound bound by the tape T in the bill B. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the clamp portion 94 is provided below the bill B and a pair of upper clamp portions 941, 942 provided above the bill B conveyed into the tape loop L. It has a pair of lower clamp parts 943, 944, and a moving mechanism for moving one upper clamp part 942 and lower clamp parts 943, 944 up and down.
 上クランプ部941,942は、テープ幅方向において、テープTの両側に設けられている。第2搬送部8から遠い方の上クランプ部941は、固定されており、上下に移動不能である。一方、第2搬送部8に近い方の上クランプ部942は、上下に移動可能に構成されている。両者を区別する場合には、前者を固定上クランプ部941と称し、後者を可動上クランプ部942と称する。 The upper clamp portions 941 and 942 are provided on both sides of the tape T in the tape width direction. The upper clamp part 941 far from the second transport part 8 is fixed and cannot move up and down. On the other hand, the upper clamp part 942 closer to the second transport part 8 is configured to be movable up and down. In distinguishing the two, the former is referred to as a fixed upper clamp portion 941 and the latter is referred to as a movable upper clamp portion 942.
 固定上クランプ部941は、第1及び第2当接部941a,941bを有している。第1及び第2当接部941a,941bは、紙幣Bの短手方向に並んでいる。第1当接部941aと第2当接部941bとは、同じ高さに位置している。尚、第1当接部941aと第2当接部941bとの間には、テープ把持部921のベース板922aが配置されている。ベース板922aは、第1及び第2当接部941a,941bよりも低い位置に位置している。 The fixed upper clamp portion 941 has first and second contact portions 941a and 941b. The first and second contact portions 941 a and 941 b are arranged in the short direction of the bill B. The first contact portion 941a and the second contact portion 941b are located at the same height. A base plate 922a of the tape gripping portion 921 is disposed between the first contact portion 941a and the second contact portion 941b. The base plate 922a is located at a position lower than the first and second contact portions 941a and 941b.
 一方、可動上クランプ部942は、第1~第3当接部942a~942cを有している。第1~第3当接部942a~942cは、紙幣Bの短手方向に並んでいる。第3当接部942cは、該短手方向において第1当接部942aと第2当接部942bとの間に位置している。第1当接部942aと第2当接部942bとは、同じ高さに位置している。第3当接部942cは、第1当接部942a及び第2当接部942bよりも低い位置に位置している。可動上クランプ部942は、第1当接部942a及び第2当接部942bが固定上クランプ部941の第1当接部941a及び第2当接部941bと同じ高さになるクランプ位置と、第3当接部942cが固定上クランプ部941の第1当接部941a及び第2当接部941bよりも高くなる退避位置との間で上下に移動する。尚、可動上クランプ部942がクランプ位置に位置するときには、第3当接部942cは、テープ把持部921のベース板922aと略同じ高さに位置している。 On the other hand, the movable upper clamp portion 942 has first to third contact portions 942a to 942c. The first to third contact portions 942a to 942c are arranged in the short direction of the bill B. The third contact portion 942c is located between the first contact portion 942a and the second contact portion 942b in the lateral direction. The first contact portion 942a and the second contact portion 942b are located at the same height. The third contact portion 942c is located at a position lower than the first contact portion 942a and the second contact portion 942b. The movable upper clamp portion 942 includes a clamp position where the first contact portion 942a and the second contact portion 942b are the same height as the first contact portion 941a and the second contact portion 941b of the fixed upper clamp portion 941. The third contact portion 942c moves up and down between a retracted position that is higher than the first contact portion 941a and the second contact portion 941b of the fixed upper clamp portion 941. When the movable upper clamp portion 942 is located at the clamp position, the third contact portion 942c is located at substantially the same height as the base plate 922a of the tape grip portion 921.
 下クランプ部943,944は、テープ幅方向において、テープTの両側に設けられている。第2搬送部8から遠い方の下クランプ部943と第2搬送部8に近い方の下クランプ部944とは、同じ構成をしている。下クランプ部943は、第1及び第2当接部943a,943bを有している。第1及び第2当接部943a,943bは、紙幣Bの短手方向に並んでいる。第1当接部943aと第2当接部943bとは、同じ高さに位置している。第1及び第2当接部943a,943bはそれぞれ、固定上クランプ部941の第1及び第2当接部941a,941bと対向している。下クランプ部944は、第1及び第2当接部944a,944bを有している。第1及び第2当接部944a,944bは、紙幣Bの短手方向に並んでいる。第1当接部944aと第2当接部944bとは、同じ高さに位置し且つ、下クランプ部943の第1当接部943aと第2当接部943bとも同じ高さに位置している。第1及び第2当接部944a,944bはそれぞれ、可動上クランプ部942の第1及び第2当接部942a,942bと対向している。 The lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are provided on both sides of the tape T in the tape width direction. The lower clamp part 943 far from the second transport part 8 and the lower clamp part 944 closer to the second transport part 8 have the same configuration. The lower clamp portion 943 includes first and second contact portions 943a and 943b. The first and second contact portions 943 a and 943 b are arranged in the short direction of the bill B. The first contact portion 943a and the second contact portion 943b are located at the same height. The first and second contact portions 943a and 943b are opposed to the first and second contact portions 941a and 941b of the fixed upper clamp portion 941, respectively. The lower clamp portion 944 has first and second contact portions 944a and 944b. The first and second contact portions 944 a and 944 b are arranged in the short direction of the banknote B. The first contact portion 944a and the second contact portion 944b are located at the same height, and the first contact portion 943a and the second contact portion 943b of the lower clamp portion 943 are located at the same height. Yes. The first and second contact portions 944a and 944b oppose the first and second contact portions 942a and 942b of the movable upper clamp portion 942, respectively.
 上下移動機構は、モータと、モータに回転駆動される円盤と、可動上クランプ部942及び下クランプ部943,944を上下に移動可能に支持する支持部と、円盤と可動上クランプ部942及び下クランプ部943,944をそれぞれ連結するリンクとを有している。円盤には、カム溝が形成されている。リンクは、カム溝の形状に応じて、円盤の回転を可動上クランプ部942及び下クランプ部943,944のそれぞれに伝達する。可動上クランプ部942及び下クランプ部943,944は、円盤が回転駆動されると、カム溝の形状に応じて上下動する。それにより、下クランプ部943,944が上クランプ部941,942に近接したり、離反したりし、さらには、可動上クランプ942がクランプ位置と退避位置との間で上下動する。尚、可動上クランプ部942用のカム溝と、下クランプ部943,944用のカム溝とは形状が異なっている。そのため、可動上クランプ部942と下クランプ部943,944とは、それぞれ同じ量だけ上下動するのではなく、異なる態様で上下動する。尚、モータは、一時把持部93の移動機構のモータと共通である。 The vertical movement mechanism includes a motor, a disk that is rotationally driven by the motor, a support part that supports the movable upper clamp part 942 and the lower clamp parts 943 and 944 to be movable up and down, a disk, a movable upper clamp part 942, and a lower part. It has a link which connects clamp parts 943 and 944, respectively. A cam groove is formed in the disk. The link transmits the rotation of the disk to each of the movable upper clamp portion 942 and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 according to the shape of the cam groove. The movable upper clamp portion 942 and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 move up and down according to the shape of the cam groove when the disk is driven to rotate. As a result, the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 approach or separate from the upper clamp portions 941 and 942, and the movable upper clamp 942 moves up and down between the clamp position and the retracted position. The cam groove for the movable upper clamp portion 942 and the cam groove for the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are different in shape. Therefore, the movable upper clamp portion 942 and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 move up and down in different manners instead of moving up and down by the same amount. The motor is the same as the motor of the moving mechanism of the temporary holding part 93.
 ここで、下クランプ部943,944は、ガイド部925の下ガイド部926と一体的に構成されている。つまり、下クランプ部943,944及び下ガイド部926は、一体的に上下に移動する。つまり、下クランプ部943,944を上下に移動させる移動機構は、下ガイド部926の移動機構と共通である。 Here, the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are formed integrally with the lower guide portion 926 of the guide portion 925. That is, the lower clamp parts 943, 944 and the lower guide part 926 move up and down integrally. That is, the moving mechanism that moves the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 up and down is the same as the moving mechanism of the lower guide portion 926.
 ヒータ95は、テープTを紙幣Bに巻き付けた状態でテープT同士を接合する。ヒータ95は、テープT同士を熱溶着する。ヒータ95は、接合部の一例である。 The heater 95 joins the tapes T with the tape T wound around the bill B. The heater 95 thermally welds the tapes T to each other. The heater 95 is an example of a joint.
 カッタ96は、テープTを紙幣Bに巻き付けられていない部分、即ち、テープTのうち紙幣Bを結束して余った部分を切断する。カッタ96の先端は、鋸歯状の切断刃が設けられている。カッタ96は、図5に示すように、両側端縁において外方に突出するガイド片96aを有している。カッタ96は、切断部の一例である。 The cutter 96 cuts a portion where the tape T is not wrapped around the bill B, that is, a portion of the tape T where the bill B is bound and left over. The tip of the cutter 96 is provided with a sawtooth cutting blade. As shown in FIG. 5, the cutter 96 has guide pieces 96 a that protrude outward at both side edges. The cutter 96 is an example of a cutting part.
 ヒータ95及びカッタ96は、図5に示すように、ユニット化されて、テープ輪Lの中へ配置される紙幣Bに対して押印部98とは反対側、具体的には、紙幣Bの集積方向において押印部98とは反対側に配置されている。より詳しくは、ヒータ95及びカッタ96は、テープ把持部921の上方に配置されている。ヒータ95は、テープ把持部921のベース板922aの上でテープTを接合する。カッタ96は、テープ把持部921のベース板922aの上でテープTを切断する。 As shown in FIG. 5, the heater 95 and the cutter 96 are unitized and are arranged on the side opposite to the stamped portion 98 with respect to the bill B arranged in the tape ring L, specifically, the bill B is stacked. It is arrange | positioned in the direction on the opposite side to the stamp part 98. FIG. More specifically, the heater 95 and the cutter 96 are disposed above the tape grip portion 921. The heater 95 joins the tape T on the base plate 922a of the tape grip portion 921. The cutter 96 cuts the tape T on the base plate 922a of the tape grip portion 921.
 印字部97は、図3に示すように、テープ搬送部912に設けられている。印字部97は、テープ搬送部912により搬送されるテープTに印字を行う。印字部97は、例えば、結束される紙幣Bに関連する情報(例えば、金種、日時、連続番号等)をテープTに印字する。印字部97の印字位置は、印字が押印部98による押印と重ならないように、押印部98による押印予定部分に対してテープ幅方向にずれている。 The printing unit 97 is provided in the tape transport unit 912 as shown in FIG. The printing unit 97 performs printing on the tape T conveyed by the tape conveying unit 912. The printing unit 97 prints information (for example, denomination, date and time, serial number, etc.) related to the banknotes B to be bound on the tape T, for example. The printing position of the printing part 97 is shifted in the tape width direction with respect to the part to be imprinted by the imprinting part 98 so that the printing does not overlap with the imprinting by the imprinting part 98.
 押印部98は、前記クランプ部94で紙幣Bを圧縮し且つ該紙幣BにテープTを巻き付けた状態で該テープTに押印する。押印部98は、例えば、結束される紙幣Bに関連する印(例えば、金融機関印、正券又は損券等の紙幣の種類を表す印等)をテープTに押印する。押印部98は、図5に示すように、テープ輪Lの中へ配置される紙幣Bに対してヒータ95及びカッタ96とは反対側、具体的には、紙幣Bの集積方向においてヒータ95及びカッタ96とは反対側に配置されている。押印部98は、スタンプ981と、スタンプ981を上下方向に移動させる移動機構982とを有している。移動機構982がスタンプ981を上方へ移動させることによって、スタンプ981は、紙幣Bに巻き付けられたテープTに紙幣Bの集積方向から押印する。押印部98は、下ガイド部926と一体的に設けられており、下ガイド部926が上下方向に移動するときに下ガイド部926と一体的に上下方向に移動する。スタンプ981は、図6に示すように、下ガイド部926の短手方向、即ち、テープTの幅方向において、下ガイド部926の一対の側壁926a,926aの間に配置されている。ただし、スタンプ981は、通常状態においては、下ガイド部926の底壁926bの貫通孔926dの下方に配置され、底壁926bよりも上方へ突出していない。スタンプ981は、移動機構982により上方へ移動させられることによって、貫通孔926dを貫通して、底壁926bよりも上方へ突出した状態となり、テープTに押印する。 The stamp portion 98 compresses the bill B with the clamp portion 94 and stamps the tape T with the tape T wound around the bill B. The stamping part 98 stamps, for example, a mark related to the banknotes B to be bound (for example, a financial institution mark, a mark indicating the type of banknotes such as a correct note or a non-performing bill) on the tape T. As shown in FIG. 5, the stamping portion 98 is provided on the opposite side of the heater 95 and the cutter 96 with respect to the bill B arranged in the tape ring L, specifically, in the stacking direction of the bill B, It is arranged on the side opposite to the cutter 96. The stamp unit 98 includes a stamp 981 and a moving mechanism 982 that moves the stamp 981 in the vertical direction. When the moving mechanism 982 moves the stamp 981 upward, the stamp 981 impresses the tape T wound around the banknote B from the stacking direction of the banknote B. The stamp portion 98 is provided integrally with the lower guide portion 926, and moves in the vertical direction integrally with the lower guide portion 926 when the lower guide portion 926 moves in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 6, the stamp 981 is disposed between the pair of side walls 926a and 926a of the lower guide portion 926 in the short direction of the lower guide portion 926, that is, in the width direction of the tape T. However, in the normal state, the stamp 981 is disposed below the through hole 926d in the bottom wall 926b of the lower guide portion 926, and does not protrude upward from the bottom wall 926b. When the stamp 981 is moved upward by the moving mechanism 982, the stamp 981 passes through the through hole 926d, protrudes upward from the bottom wall 926b, and is stamped on the tape T.
 〈紙幣処理装置のシステム構成〉
 図8に、紙幣処理装置100の概略構成を示すブロック図を示す。
<System configuration of banknote processing device>
In FIG. 8, the block diagram which shows schematic structure of the banknote processing apparatus 100 is shown.
 紙幣処理装置100は、例えば周知のマイクロコンピュータをベースとした制御部120を備えている。制御部120には、前述したホッパ部2、識別部3、結束スタッカ4、非結束スタッカ5、リジェクトスタッカ6、第1搬送部7、第2搬送部8、結束部9、第3搬送部10及びタッチパネル17が、信号の送受信可能に接続されている。また、制御部120には、紙幣センサ25、第1紙幣センサ45、第2紙幣センサ46、集積センサ52、集積センサ62、通過センサ74、第1テープセンサ9210、第2テープセンサ9211及び第3テープセンサ926eが接続され、それらの検出信号が入力されるように構成されている。制御部120は、タッチパネル17からの入力信号及び各種センサからの検知信号等に基づいて制御信号を生成し、ホッパ部2等へ該制御信号を出力する。ホッパ部2等は、その制御信号に従って動作する。例えば、結束スタッカ4を例に挙げると、容器40の前壁部40a、ステージ41及び羽根車42が制御部120により制御される。 The banknote handling apparatus 100 includes a control unit 120 based on a known microcomputer, for example. The control unit 120 includes the hopper unit 2, the identification unit 3, the binding stacker 4, the non-binding stacker 5, the reject stacker 6, the first transport unit 7, the second transport unit 8, the binding unit 9, and the third transport unit 10. The touch panel 17 is connected to be able to transmit and receive signals. Further, the control unit 120 includes the banknote sensor 25, the first banknote sensor 45, the second banknote sensor 46, the integration sensor 52, the integration sensor 62, the passage sensor 74, the first tape sensor 9210, the second tape sensor 9211, and the third. A tape sensor 926e is connected and these detection signals are input. The control unit 120 generates a control signal based on an input signal from the touch panel 17 and detection signals from various sensors, and outputs the control signal to the hopper unit 2 and the like. The hopper unit 2 and the like operate according to the control signal. For example, taking the bundling stacker 4 as an example, the front wall 40a, the stage 41, and the impeller 42 of the container 40 are controlled by the controller 120.
 〈紙幣処理装置の動作説明〉
 以下、紙幣処理装置100の入金処理について説明する。入金処理においては、バラ状態の紙幣が分類され、所定のスタッカに集積され、さらには、所定の紙幣については結束される。以下では、結束対象の所定の一種類の紙幣を第1及び第2結束スタッカ4A,4Bに所定枚数ずつ交互に集積し、該所定枚数集積した紙幣を順次、結束部9により結束する同一種類結束処理について説明する。
<Operation description of banknote processing device>
Hereinafter, the deposit process of the banknote handling apparatus 100 will be described. In the deposit process, the banknotes in a loose state are classified and accumulated in a predetermined stacker, and further, the predetermined banknotes are bound. In the following, a predetermined type of banknotes to be bound are stacked alternately on the first and second binding stackers 4A and 4B by a predetermined number, and the predetermined number of stacked banknotes are sequentially bound by the binding unit 9. Processing will be described.
 紙幣処理装置100は、テラーカウンタ上であって、オペレータがテラーカウンタを挟んで顧客と正対したときにオペレータの少し左側(顧客の右側)に設置される。このとき、紙幣処理装置100は、筐体12の第1側面123が顧客の方を向くように設置される。この状態においては、筐体12の第2側面124は、オペレータの方を向いている。ただし、紙幣処理装置100はオペレータの少し左側に位置するので、顧客も第2側面124を視認することができる。 The banknote handling apparatus 100 is on the teller counter, and is installed slightly on the left side (right side of the customer) of the operator when the operator faces the customer across the teller counter. At this time, the banknote handling apparatus 100 is installed such that the first side surface 123 of the housing 12 faces the customer. In this state, the second side surface 124 of the housing 12 faces the operator. However, since the banknote handling apparatus 100 is located slightly on the left side of the operator, the customer can also visually recognize the second side surface 124.
 まず、オペレータは顧客から入金すべきバラ状態の紙幣を受け取り、該紙幣をホッパ部2へ載置する。このとき、バラ状態の紙幣に複数種類の紙幣が混在していたとしても、それらを分類することなく、ホッパ部2へ載置する。オペレータは、紙幣の寸法に合わせて、ガイド部22を調整する。続いて、オペレータは、タッチパネル17を操作して、紙幣の取込を開始する。尚、紙幣センサ25がホッパ部2への紙幣の載置を検知すると、紙幣処理装置100が自動的に紙幣の取込を開始するようにしてもよい。 First, an operator receives a bill in a rose state to be deposited from a customer, and places the bill on the hopper unit 2. At this time, even if a plurality of types of banknotes are mixed in the banknotes in a rose state, they are placed on the hopper unit 2 without being classified. An operator adjusts the guide part 22 according to the dimension of a banknote. Subsequently, the operator operates the touch panel 17 to start taking in banknotes. Note that when the bill sensor 25 detects the placement of the bill on the hopper unit 2, the bill processing apparatus 100 may automatically start taking in the bill.
 ホッパ部2に載置された紙幣は、取込ローラ23が作動することにより1枚ずつ取込口24から、筐体12内へ取り込まれていく。取り込まれた紙幣は、第1搬送部7により搬送され、識別部3を通過する。識別部3は、通過する紙幣の紙幣種別を取得し、その紙幣種別を制御部120へ通知する。 The banknotes placed on the hopper unit 2 are taken into the housing 12 from the take-in port 24 one by one when the take-in roller 23 is operated. The taken banknote is transported by the first transport unit 7 and passes through the identification unit 3. The identification unit 3 acquires the banknote type of the banknote that passes through and notifies the control unit 120 of the banknote type.
 制御部120は、紙幣の種類に応じて、紙幣に対応する搬送先を決定する。具体的には、紙幣が結束対象の所定金種の紙幣であって且つ正券紙幣であるときには、制御部120は、搬送先を結束スタッカ4(4A及び4Bの何れか一方)とする。紙幣が結束対象の所定金種の紙幣であって且つ損券紙幣であるときには、制御部120は、搬送先を第1非結束スタッカ5Aとする。紙幣が所定金種以外の金種の紙幣であるときには、制御部120は、搬送先を第2非結束スタッカ5Bとする。紙幣がリジェクト紙幣であるときには、制御部120は、搬送先をリジェクトスタッカ6とする。 Control part 120 determines the conveyance destination corresponding to a banknote according to the kind of banknote. Specifically, when the banknote is a banknote of a predetermined denomination to be bound and is a correct banknote, the control unit 120 sets the transport destination as the binding stacker 4 (any one of 4A and 4B). When the banknote is a banknote of a predetermined denomination and is a banknote banknote, the control unit 120 sets the transport destination as the first non-binding stacker 5A. When the banknote is a banknote of a denomination other than the predetermined denomination, the control unit 120 sets the transport destination as the second non-binding stacker 5B. When the banknote is a reject banknote, the control unit 120 sets the transport destination as the reject stacker 6.
 制御部120は、紙幣が搬送先となるスタッカに搬送されるように第1搬送部7を制御する。具体的には、制御部120は、搬送先となるスタッカへ繋がる分岐路72に対応する振り分け機構73を該紙幣が主搬送路71から該分岐路72へ導かれるように制御する。制御部120は、該分岐路72の直前の通過センサ74が紙幣を検知したときに、該振り分け機構73を切り替える。さらに、制御部120は、搬送先となるスタッカの羽根車42、羽根車51又は羽根車61を制御して、紙幣をスタッカ内に搬入する。 Control part 120 controls the 1st conveyance part 7 so that a bill may be conveyed to the stacker used as a conveyance place. Specifically, the control unit 120 controls the sorting mechanism 73 corresponding to the branch path 72 connected to the stacker as the transport destination so that the bill is guided from the main transport path 71 to the branch path 72. The control unit 120 switches the sorting mechanism 73 when the passage sensor 74 immediately before the branch path 72 detects a bill. Furthermore, the control unit 120 controls the impeller 42, the impeller 51, or the impeller 61 of the stacker serving as a transport destination, and carries bills into the stacker.
 結束スタッカ4に搬送される紙幣は、2つの結束スタッカ4のうち一方の結束スタッカ4へ搬送される。一方の結束スタッカ4に集積された紙幣の枚数が所定の結束枚数(例えば、100枚)に達すると、それ以降の紙幣は、他方の結束スタッカ4へ搬送される。ここでは、紙幣がまず第1結束スタッカ4Aへ搬送されるものとする。各第1結束スタッカ4Aにおいては、紙幣が搬送されてくると、羽根車42の回転によって、紙幣が1枚ずつ上方に重ねられていく。このとき、ステージ41上の最も上の紙幣が第2紙幣センサ46により検知されると、ステージ41は、所定量だけ下降し、第2紙幣センサ46が紙幣を検知していない状態となる。その後、紙幣がさらに積み重ねられ、第2紙幣センサ46が紙幣を検知するようになると、再びステージ41が所定量だけ下降する。この処理を繰り返すことにより、結束スタッカ4内に落下する紙幣の落下距離を一定の範囲に保つことができるので、自然落下する紙幣の落下位置及び落下したときの姿勢を一定にすることができる。 The bills conveyed to the bundling stacker 4 are conveyed to one of the two bundling stackers 4. When the number of banknotes stacked on one binding stacker 4 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100), the subsequent banknotes are conveyed to the other binding stacker 4. Here, it is assumed that the banknote is first conveyed to the first binding stacker 4A. In each first binding stacker 4 </ b> A, when bills are conveyed, the bills are stacked one by one by the rotation of the impeller 42. At this time, when the uppermost banknote on the stage 41 is detected by the second banknote sensor 46, the stage 41 is lowered by a predetermined amount, and the second banknote sensor 46 is not detecting the banknote. Thereafter, when the banknotes are further stacked and the second banknote sensor 46 detects the banknotes, the stage 41 is lowered again by a predetermined amount. By repeating this process, the falling distance of the banknotes falling into the bundling stacker 4 can be kept within a certain range, so that the falling position of the banknotes that fall naturally and the posture when they fall can be made constant.
 第1結束スタッカ4Aに集積された紙幣が結束枚数に達すると、制御部120は、第2搬送部8を制御し、把持ユニット81により第1結束スタッカ4A内の紙幣を把持し、該紙幣を結束部9へ搬送する。その後、制御部120は、結束部9を制御して、紙幣をテープTで結束する。 When the banknotes accumulated in the first binding stacker 4A reach the number of bindings, the control unit 120 controls the second transport unit 8 to grip the banknotes in the first binding stacker 4A by the gripping unit 81, and to remove the banknotes. It is conveyed to the binding unit 9. Thereafter, the control unit 120 controls the binding unit 9 to bind the banknotes with the tape T.
 尚、第1結束スタッカ4Aに集積された紙幣が結束枚数に達すると、それ以降の紙幣は第2結束スタッカ4Bに集積される。その後、第2結束スタッカ4Bに集積された紙幣が結束枚数に達したときには、それ以降の紙幣は再び第1結束スタッカ4Aに集積されるようになる。このときまでには、第1結束スタッカ4A内の紙幣の搬出が完了しているので、第1結束スタッカ4A内は空の状態になっている。このように、2つの結束スタッカ4を設けることによって、紙幣の集積を連続して行いつつ、結束処理を行うことができる。 Note that when the banknotes stacked on the first binding stacker 4A reach the binding number, the subsequent banknotes are stacked on the second binding stacker 4B. Thereafter, when the banknotes stacked on the second binding stacker 4B reach the binding number, the subsequent banknotes are again stacked on the first binding stacker 4A. By this time, since the banknotes in the first binding stacker 4A have been unloaded, the first binding stacker 4A is empty. Thus, by providing the two binding stackers 4, the binding process can be performed while the banknotes are continuously collected.
 続いて、制御部120は、第3搬送部10を制御して、結束紙幣を投出口111から投出する。 Subsequently, the control unit 120 controls the third transport unit 10 to throw out the bundled banknotes from the outlet 111.
 所定金種の紙幣であって且つ損券紙幣は、第1非結束スタッカ5Aへ搬送される。第1非結束スタッカ5Aにおいては、紙幣が搬送されてくると、羽根車51の回転によって、紙幣を容器50内に積み重ねていく。こうして、所定金種の紙幣であって且つ損券紙幣は、第1非結束スタッカ5Aに集積される。同様に、所定金種以外の金種の紙幣は、第2非結束スタッカ5Bへ搬送され、第2非結束スタッカ5Bに集積される。リジェクト紙幣も、リジェクトスタッカ6へ搬送され、リジェクトスタッカ6に集積される。 A banknote of a predetermined denomination and a banknote banknote is conveyed to the first non-binding stacker 5A. In the first non-binding stacker 5 </ b> A, when bills are conveyed, the bills are stacked in the container 50 by the rotation of the impeller 51. In this way, banknotes of a predetermined denomination and banknotes are stacked on the first non-binding stacker 5A. Similarly, banknotes of denominations other than the predetermined denomination are conveyed to the second non-bundling stacker 5B and accumulated in the second non-bundling stacker 5B. Reject banknotes are also transported to the reject stacker 6 and accumulated in the reject stacker 6.
 以上の処理が、ホッパ部2に載置された紙幣が無くなるまで続けられる。ホッパ部2の紙幣の有無は、紙幣センサ25によって検知される。 The above processing is continued until there are no more banknotes placed on the hopper unit 2. The presence or absence of banknotes in the hopper 2 is detected by the banknote sensor 25.
 ホッパ部2に載置された紙幣の処理が完了すると、リジェクト紙幣の取込及び識別を再度行う。つまり、オペレータは、リジェクト紙幣をリジェクトスタッカ6から抜き出して、ホッパ部2へ載置し、再び取込を行う。リジェクト紙幣は、何らかの理由で正常な紙幣として識別されなかった紙幣であるので、再び取込及び識別を試みる。それでも尚、リジェクト紙幣として識別される紙幣は、再びリジェクトスタッカ6に集積される。オペレータは、再び集積された紙幣を顧客に返却する。 When the processing of the banknotes placed on the hopper unit 2 is completed, the rejected banknotes are taken in and identified again. That is, the operator removes the reject banknote from the reject stacker 6, places it on the hopper unit 2, and takes it in again. Since the reject banknote is a banknote that has not been identified as a normal banknote for some reason, it tries to capture and identify again. Nevertheless, the banknotes identified as reject banknotes are again accumulated in the reject stacker 6. The operator returns the accumulated banknotes to the customer.
 尚、第1及び第2非結束スタッカ5A,5Bに集積された紙幣については、再度の取込を行わない。 In addition, about the banknote integrated | stacked on the 1st and 2nd non-bundling stackers 5A and 5B, it does not take in again.
 こうして、ホッパ部2に載置された紙幣の処理とリジェクト紙幣の再処理が完了すると、同一種類結束処理が完了し、顧客から渡された入金すべき紙幣の計数及び分別が終了する。タッチパネル17には、計数された金額が表示される。オペレータは、顧客からその金額の承認を得るか、又は、その金額と顧客が記載した入金伝票に記載された金額との一致を確認すると、タッチパネル17により入金額の確定操作を行う。確定操作が行われると、確定した入金額が上位装置(図示省略)へ通知され、入金処理が完了する。 Thus, when the processing of the banknotes placed on the hopper unit 2 and the reprocessing of the rejected banknotes are completed, the same-type bundling process is completed, and the counting and sorting of banknotes to be deposited passed from the customer are completed. On the touch panel 17, the counted amount is displayed. When the operator obtains the approval of the amount from the customer or confirms the coincidence between the amount and the amount described in the payment slip described by the customer, the operator confirms the amount of money with the touch panel 17. When the confirmation operation is performed, the confirmed deposit amount is notified to a higher-level device (not shown), and the deposit process is completed.
 入金処理の完了後は、オペレータは、投出部11に投出されている結束紙幣、結束スタッカ4に集積されている紙幣及び非結束スタッカ5に集積されている紙幣を取り出して所定の収納場所に収納する。 After completion of the depositing process, the operator takes out the bundled banknotes thrown to the dispensing unit 11, the banknotes accumulated in the bundling stacker 4, and the banknotes accumulated in the non-bundled stacker 5, and takes a predetermined storage location. Store in.
 以上の処理により、複数種類の紙幣が混在し且つバラ状態であった紙幣は、所定金種の正券紙幣と、所定金種の損券紙幣と、所定金種以外の金種の紙幣と、リジェクト紙幣とに分類され、所定金種の正券紙幣については結束枚数ごとに結束された状態となる。 By the above processing, a banknote in which a plurality of types of banknotes are mixed and in a loose state is a regular banknote of a predetermined denomination, a banknote banknote of a predetermined denomination, and a banknote of a denomination other than the predetermined denomination, The bills are classified as reject banknotes, and the correct banknotes of a predetermined denomination are in a state of being bound for each bound number.
 〈集積後の処理の詳細説明〉
 以下に、紙幣が結束スタッカ4に集積されてから投出部11へ投出されるまでの処理を詳細に説明する。
<Detailed description of processing after integration>
Hereinafter, a process from when the banknotes are accumulated in the bundling stacker 4 until the banknotes are thrown out to the dispensing unit 11 will be described in detail.
  -集積紙幣の圧縮-
 図9は、結束スタッカにおける紙幣の圧縮処理の説明図であり、(A)は、紙幣の集積完了直後の状態を示し、(B)は、紙幣の圧縮完了後の状態を示す。尚、図9においては、第1紙幣センサ45の図示を省略している。
-Compression of banknotes-
FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of banknote compression processing in the binding stacker, where (A) shows a state immediately after completion of banknote accumulation, and (B) shows a state after completion of banknote compression. In addition, in FIG. 9, illustration of the 1st banknote sensor 45 is abbreviate | omitted.
 図9(A)に示すように、結束スタッカ4において紙幣の集積が完了した直後は、ステージ41が比較的下方に位置し、ステージ41上の紙幣Bのうち最も上の紙幣は、天板44から離れている。 As shown in FIG. 9A, immediately after the stacking of banknotes is completed in the bundling stacker 4, the stage 41 is positioned relatively downward, and the top banknote among the banknotes B on the stage 41 is the top plate 44. Away from.
 紙幣Bの集積が完了すると、ステージ41は上昇し、集積された紙幣Bをステージ41と天板44とで圧縮する。制御部120は、ステージ41を、図9(B)に示すように、ステージ41と天板44との距離が所定値T1となる位置まで上昇させる。その結果、ステージ41上の紙幣Bは、前記所定値T1と同じ厚みまで圧縮される。尚、紙幣Bが新札である場合など、ステージ41上に自由落下して集積された紙幣Bの厚みが前記所定値T1に達していない場合には、ステージ41が前述の如く上昇しても、該紙幣Bは圧縮されない。ステージ41及び天板44は、圧縮部の一例である。 When the accumulation of the bills B is completed, the stage 41 rises and compresses the accumulated bills B with the stage 41 and the top plate 44. As shown in FIG. 9B, the control unit 120 raises the stage 41 to a position where the distance between the stage 41 and the top plate 44 is a predetermined value T1. As a result, the banknote B on the stage 41 is compressed to the same thickness as the predetermined value T1. Note that, when the bill B is a new bill or the like, and the thickness of the bill B that is freely dropped and accumulated on the stage 41 does not reach the predetermined value T1, the stage 41 is raised as described above. The bill B is not compressed. The stage 41 and the top plate 44 are an example of a compression unit.
  -結束部までの紙幣の搬送-
 紙幣Bの集積が完了すると、第2搬送部8は、紙幣Bを結束スタッカ4から結束部9へ搬送する。図10に、第2搬送部8が紙幣Bを結束スタッカ4から抜き出した状態の図を示す。図11に、第2搬送部8が紙幣Bをテープ輪Lの側方まで搬送した状態の図を示す。
-Conveying banknotes to the binding part-
When the accumulation of the bills B is completed, the second transport unit 8 transports the bills B from the binding stacker 4 to the binding unit 9. In FIG. 10, the figure of the state which the 2nd conveyance part 8 extracted the banknote B from the binding stacker 4 is shown. In FIG. 11, the figure of the state which the 2nd conveyance part 8 conveyed the banknote B to the side of the tape ring L is shown.
 詳しくは、紙幣Bの集積が完了すると、第2搬送部8は、紙幣Bの集積が完了した結束スタッカ4まで移動し、結束スタッカ4内の紙幣Bを把持し、図10に示すように結束スタッカ4から抜き出す。ここでは、第1結束スタッカ4Aにおいて紙幣Bの集積が完了したとする。そして、第2搬送部8の把持ユニット81は、第1結束スタッカ4A内の紙幣Bを把持する。結束スタッカ4のステージ41及び天板44には、把持ユニット81が挿通可能な隙間が設けられている。そのため、把持ユニット81は、ステージ41と天板44とで挟持された状態の紙幣Bを把持することができる。把持ユニット81は、ステージ41と天板44とで圧縮された紙幣Bを集積方向から挟持してさらに圧縮する。すなわち、把持ユニット81で把持された紙幣Bの厚みT2は、ステージ41と天板44とで圧縮された紙幣Bの厚みT1よりも薄くなる。尚、ステージ41は、把持ユニット81が紙幣Bを挟持した後、下降する。第2搬送部8は、把持した紙幣Bを第1水平方向へ第1結束スタッカ4Aから抜き出す。このとき、第2搬送部8は、紙幣Bを所定の第1位置(図10に示す位置)まで第1水平方向へ移動させる。この第1位置は、後述する紙幣Bを大テープ輪L2の中へ搬送する際の第1水平方向位置と一致している。 Specifically, when the stacking of the bills B is completed, the second transport unit 8 moves to the binding stacker 4 where the stacking of the bills B is completed, grips the bills B in the binding stacker 4, and binds as shown in FIG. Pull out from the stacker 4. Here, it is assumed that the accumulation of the bills B is completed in the first binding stacker 4A. And the holding unit 81 of the 2nd conveyance part 8 hold | grips the banknote B in 4 A of 1st binding stackers. The stage 41 and the top plate 44 of the bundling stacker 4 are provided with a gap through which the gripping unit 81 can be inserted. Therefore, the gripping unit 81 can grip the banknote B that is sandwiched between the stage 41 and the top plate 44. The gripping unit 81 sandwiches the banknote B compressed by the stage 41 and the top plate 44 from the stacking direction and further compresses it. That is, the thickness T2 of the bill B gripped by the gripping unit 81 is thinner than the thickness T1 of the bill B compressed by the stage 41 and the top plate 44. The stage 41 descends after the gripping unit 81 holds the bill B. The second transport unit 8 extracts the gripped banknote B from the first binding stacker 4A in the first horizontal direction. At this time, the 2nd conveyance part 8 moves the banknote B to a 1st horizontal direction to the predetermined | prescribed 1st position (position shown in FIG. 10). This 1st position corresponds with the 1st horizontal direction position at the time of conveying bill B mentioned below into large tape ring L2.
 続いて、第2搬送部8は、図11に示すように、紙幣Bを所定の第2位置まで上下方向へ移動させる。この第2位置は、紙幣Bを大テープ輪L2の中へ搬送する位置である。第2位置においては、紙幣Bの長手方向を向いて見たときに、紙幣Bは大テープ輪L2の中央付近に位置している。 Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11, the second transport unit 8 moves the banknote B up and down to a predetermined second position. This 2nd position is a position which conveys bill B into large tape ring L2. In the second position, when viewed in the longitudinal direction of the bill B, the bill B is located near the center of the large tape ring L2.
  -テープ輪の作成-
 制御部120は、第2搬送部8が紙幣Bを結束スタッカ4から第2位置まで搬送する間にテープ輪Lを作成する。図12に、テープ把持部921がテープTの先端部を把持した状態の図を示す。図13に、テープ把持部921がテープTの先端部を把持した状態で回転し始めた状態の図を示す。図14は、テープ把持部921が小テープ輪L1を作成した状態の図を示す。図15は、大テープ輪L2の作成が完了した状態の図を示す。
-Creation of tape ring-
The control unit 120 creates the tape loop L while the second transport unit 8 transports the banknote B from the binding stacker 4 to the second position. FIG. 12 shows a state where the tape gripping portion 921 grips the leading end portion of the tape T. FIG. 13 shows a state in which the tape gripping portion 921 starts to rotate while gripping the leading end portion of the tape T. FIG. 14 shows a state where the tape gripping portion 921 has created the small tape ring L1. FIG. 15 shows a state in which the creation of the large tape ring L2 has been completed.
 まず、送り出しローラ対920は、第1テープセンサ9210がテープTの先端を検知するまでテープTを引き戻す。テープTの先端が検知されると、送り出しローラ対920がテープTを送り出す。このとき、テープ把持部921は、可動部923とベース板922aとの間に隙間を空けた状態で且つその隙間に送り出しローラ対920から送り出されたテープTが入り込む姿勢で待機している。テープTの先端部が可動部923とベース板922aとの間に入り込むと、回転シャフト924が回転駆動され、図12に示すように、可動部923とベース板922aとでテープTの先端部を把持する。可動部923は、ベース板922aと共にテープTの先端部を把持した状態でロックされる。テープTの先端部は、略水平な状態でテープ把持部921に把持されている。 First, the delivery roller pair 920 pulls back the tape T until the first tape sensor 9210 detects the tip of the tape T. When the leading end of the tape T is detected, the feed roller pair 920 feeds the tape T. At this time, the tape gripping portion 921 stands by in a state where a gap is left between the movable portion 923 and the base plate 922a and the tape T sent from the feed roller pair 920 enters the gap. When the leading end of the tape T enters between the movable portion 923 and the base plate 922a, the rotary shaft 924 is driven to rotate, and the leading end of the tape T is moved between the movable portion 923 and the base plate 922a as shown in FIG. Hold it. The movable portion 923 is locked in a state where the tip portion of the tape T is held together with the base plate 922a. The tip of the tape T is held by the tape holding portion 921 in a substantially horizontal state.
 また、送り出しローラ対920による送り出しと並行して、印字部97がテープTに印字を行う。 The printing unit 97 prints on the tape T in parallel with the feeding by the feeding roller pair 920.
 次に、テープ把持部921は、図13に示すように、テープTの先端部を把持した状態で回転を始める。このとき、送り出しローラ対920によるテープTの送り出しは継続している。テープ把持部921は、テープTの先端を下方へ移動させるように、即ち、図13において反時計回りに回転する。 Next, as shown in FIG. 13, the tape gripping portion 921 starts to rotate while gripping the tip end portion of the tape T. At this time, the delivery of the tape T by the delivery roller pair 920 continues. The tape gripping portion 921 rotates so as to move the tip end of the tape T downward, that is, counterclockwise in FIG.
 テープ把持部921が略一回転すると、図14に示すように、テープ輪Lが作成される。こうして、テープ把持部921が略一回転することにより作成されるテープ輪Lを「小テープ輪L1」と称する。テープ把持部921が把持するテープTの先端部は、小テープ輪L1の上部に位置しており、小テープ輪L1は、テープ把持部921の下方に作成される。また、小テープ輪L1は、送り出しローラ対920よりも低い位置に作成されている。 When the tape gripping portion 921 rotates approximately once, a tape ring L is created as shown in FIG. Thus, the tape loop L created by the tape gripping portion 921 rotating substantially once is referred to as “small tape loop L1”. The tip of the tape T gripped by the tape gripping portion 921 is positioned above the small tape ring L1, and the small tape ring L1 is created below the tape gripping portion 921. The small tape ring L1 is formed at a position lower than the feed roller pair 920.
 小テープ輪L1が形成されると、テープ把持部921の回転が停止する一方で、送り出しローラ対920によるテープTの送り出しは継続される。その結果、小テープ輪L1は、徐々に大きくなっていく。ここで、テープ把持部921が把持するテープTの先端部は、小テープ輪L1の上部に位置し、送り出しローラ対920からのテープTは小テープ輪L1の上部から供給されるので、小テープ輪L1は、下方へ膨らんでいく。テープ把持部921の下方にはガイド部925が配置されているので、テープ輪Lはやがてガイド部925と接触し、ガイド部925によりテープ輪Lの形状が規定される。最終的に送り出しローラ対920からのテープTの送り出し量が所定量に達したときには、図15に示すように、ガイド部925により略長方形状に形成されたテープ輪Lが作成される。このテープ輪Lを「大テープ輪L2」と称する。大テープ輪L2は、下ガイド部926、第1側方ガイド部927及び第2側方ガイド部928に接触し、略長方形状に形成されている。それに加えて、大テープ輪L2は、第1~第4コーナーガイド部929a~929dに接触しており、これにより、角部が湾曲した長方形状に形成されている。 When the small tape ring L1 is formed, the rotation of the tape gripping portion 921 stops, while the feeding of the tape T by the feeding roller pair 920 is continued. As a result, the small tape ring L1 gradually increases. Here, the tip end portion of the tape T gripped by the tape gripping portion 921 is positioned above the small tape ring L1, and the tape T from the feed roller pair 920 is supplied from the top of the small tape ring L1, so that the small tape The ring L1 swells downward. Since the guide portion 925 is disposed below the tape grip portion 921, the tape ring L eventually comes into contact with the guide portion 925, and the shape of the tape ring L is defined by the guide portion 925. When the feed amount of the tape T from the feed roller pair 920 finally reaches a predetermined amount, a tape ring L formed in a substantially rectangular shape is created by the guide portion 925 as shown in FIG. This tape ring L is referred to as “large tape ring L2”. The large tape ring L2 is in contact with the lower guide portion 926, the first side guide portion 927, and the second side guide portion 928, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. In addition, the large tape ring L2 is in contact with the first to fourth corner guide portions 929a to 929d, thereby forming a rectangular shape with curved corner portions.
 尚、制御部120は、送り出しローラ対920からのテープTの送り出し量が前記所定量になったときに第2テープセンサ9211がテープTを検知していることをもって、大テープ輪L2が作成されたことを検知する。制御部120は、テープTの送り出し量を、第1テープセンサ9210がテープTの先端を検出してからの送り出しローラ対920のステッピングモータの駆動量に基づいて求める。送り出しローラ対920からのテープTの送り出し量が前記所定量になったにもかかわらず、第2テープセンサ9211がテープTを検知していないときには、テープ輪Lの一部が内側へ撓んで、テープ輪Lがガイド部925に沿った適切な形状(即ち、大テープ輪L2)になっていない可能性がある。そこで、制御部120は、送り出しローラ対920からのテープTの送り出し量が前記所定量になったときに第2テープセンサ9211がテープTを検知していないときには、テープTを所定の引き戻し量だけ引き戻した後、再びテープTを、全送り出し量が前記所定量になるまで送り出す。そして、制御部120は、第2テープセンサ9211がテープTを検知するか否かを確認する。第2テープセンサ9211がテープTを検知していない場合には、制御部120は、前述のテープTの引き戻し及び送り出し並びにテープ検知の確認を繰り返す。 The control unit 120 creates the large tape ring L2 when the second tape sensor 9211 detects the tape T when the amount of the tape T fed from the pair of feed rollers 920 reaches the predetermined amount. Is detected. The control unit 120 obtains the feed amount of the tape T based on the drive amount of the stepping motor of the feed roller pair 920 after the first tape sensor 9210 detects the leading end of the tape T. When the second tape sensor 9211 does not detect the tape T even though the amount of the tape T fed from the pair of feed rollers 920 has reached the predetermined amount, a part of the tape ring L bends inward, The tape ring L may not have an appropriate shape (that is, the large tape ring L2) along the guide portion 925. Therefore, when the second tape sensor 9211 does not detect the tape T when the feed amount of the tape T from the feed roller pair 920 reaches the predetermined amount, the control unit 120 moves the tape T by a predetermined pullback amount. After pulling back, the tape T is fed again until the total delivery amount reaches the predetermined amount. Then, the control unit 120 confirms whether or not the second tape sensor 9211 detects the tape T. When the second tape sensor 9211 does not detect the tape T, the control unit 120 repeats the above-described pull-back and feed-out of the tape T and confirmation of the tape detection.
 第2テープセンサ9211は、第4コーナーガイド部929dに案内されるテープTを検知するように構成されている。つまり、第2テープセンサ9211は、大テープ輪L2の中へ紙幣Bが搬送された場合に該紙幣Bよりも上方の所定の位置におけるテープTの有無を検知する。テープ輪Lの一部が内側に撓むとすれば、テープTの自重によりテープ輪Lの上部が撓む可能性が高い。つまり、第2テープセンサ9211を前述の位置に配置することによって、テープ輪Lの撓みを精度良く検知することができる。 The second tape sensor 9211 is configured to detect the tape T guided by the fourth corner guide portion 929d. That is, the second tape sensor 9211 detects the presence or absence of the tape T at a predetermined position above the banknote B when the banknote B is conveyed into the large tape loop L2. If a part of the tape ring L bends inward, there is a high possibility that the upper part of the tape ring L bends due to its own weight. That is, by arranging the second tape sensor 9211 at the aforementioned position, it is possible to accurately detect the bending of the tape ring L.
 この大テープ輪L2の作成は、図10,11に示すように、第2搬送部8が紙幣Bを結束スタッカ4から結束部9まで搬送する処理と並行して行われる。通常は(即ち、大テープ輪L2が一度のテープTの送り出しで作成された場合には)、紙幣Bが第2位置へ搬送されたときには大テープ輪L2の作成が完了している。 The creation of the large tape loop L2 is performed in parallel with the process in which the second transport unit 8 transports the banknote B from the binding stacker 4 to the binding unit 9 as shown in FIGS. Normally (that is, when the large tape loop L2 is created by feeding the tape T once), the creation of the large tape loop L2 is completed when the bill B is conveyed to the second position.
  -テープの巻き付け-
 図16に、紙幣Bの厚み方向を向いて見たときの、紙幣Bが大テープ輪L2へ搬送されて一時把持部93に把持されるまでの各部の動作説明図を示す。図17に、紙幣Bの短手方向を向いて見たときの、紙幣Bが大テープ輪L2へ搬送されて一時把持部93に把持されるまでの各部の動作説明図を示す。図16,17において、(A)は、紙幣Bが大テープ輪L2へ搬送される直前の状態であり、(B)は、紙幣Bが大テープ輪L2へ搬送された状態であり、(C)は、紙幣Bが一時把持部93により把持された状態である。また、図18に、紙幣Bの厚み方向を向いて見たときの、把持ユニット81が紙幣Bを持ち直し、紙幣BにテープTが巻き付けられるまでの各部の動作説明図を示す。図19に、紙幣Bの短手方向を向いて見たときの、把持ユニット81が紙幣Bを持ち直し、紙幣BにテープTが巻き付けられるまでの各部の動作説明図を示す。図18,19において、(A)は、把持ユニット81が紙幣Bを持ち直した状態であり、(B)は、クランプ部94が紙幣Bを押圧した状態であり、(C)は、紙幣BにテープTが巻き付けられた状態である。図20に、クランプ部94が紙幣Bを押圧したときのガイド部925の状態を示す。尚、図16,18においては、上把持部931、固定上クランプ部941及び可動上クランプ部942の図示を省略している。また、図16,18においては、下把持部932及び下クランプ部943,944のうち紙幣Bに接触している部分をハッチングで示している。
-Tape winding-
FIG. 16 shows an operation explanatory diagram of each part until the bill B is conveyed to the large tape ring L2 and gripped by the temporary gripping portion 93 when viewed in the thickness direction of the bill B. In FIG. 17, operation | movement explanatory drawing of each part until the banknote B is conveyed to the large tape ring L2 and is hold | gripped by the temporary holding part 93 when it looks in the transversal direction of the banknote B is shown. 16 and 17, (A) is a state immediately before the banknote B is transported to the large tape ring L2, (B) is a state where the banknote B is transported to the large tape ring L2, and (C ) Is a state where the bill B is gripped by the temporary gripping portion 93. FIG. 18 is an operation explanatory diagram of each part until the gripping unit 81 picks up the banknote B and the tape T is wound around the banknote B when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote B. FIG. 19 is an operation explanatory view of each part until the gripping unit 81 picks up the bill B and the tape T is wound around the bill B when viewed in the short direction of the bill B. 18 and 19, (A) is a state where the gripping unit 81 has picked up the banknote B, (B) is a state where the clamp portion 94 presses the banknote B, and (C) is In this state, the tape T is wound. In FIG. 20, the state of the guide part 925 when the clamp part 94 presses the banknote B is shown. 16 and 18, the upper grip 931, the fixed upper clamp 941 and the movable upper clamp 942 are not shown. 16 and 18, the portions of the lower grip portion 932 and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 that are in contact with the bill B are indicated by hatching.
 第2搬送部8は、前述の如く、図10、11に示すように、紙幣Bを前記第2位置まで搬送した後(図16(A)、17(A)参照)、該紙幣Bを第2水平方向へ移動させ、大テープ輪L2の中へ進入させる。第2搬送部8の把持ユニット81は、図16(B)、17(B)に示すように、紙幣Bを第2水平方向の所定の第3位置まで移動させる。この第3位置は、第2水平方向においてテープTが紙幣Bの長手方向略中央に一致する位置である。このとき、第2搬送部8の移動に連動して、一時把持部93も第2水平方向へ移動する。具体的には、一時把持部93は、第2水平方向において第2搬送部8と同じ向きに移動する。このときの移動量は、第2搬送部8の移動量に対応している。 As described above, the second transport unit 8 transports the banknote B to the second position as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 (see FIGS. 16 (A) and 17 (A)), and then transfers the banknote B to the second position. 2 Move in the horizontal direction and enter into the large tape loop L2. As shown in FIGS. 16B and 17B, the gripping unit 81 of the second transport unit 8 moves the bill B to a predetermined third position in the second horizontal direction. This third position is a position where the tape T coincides with the approximate center of the bill B in the longitudinal direction in the second horizontal direction. At this time, in conjunction with the movement of the second transport unit 8, the temporary gripping unit 93 also moves in the second horizontal direction. Specifically, the temporary holding unit 93 moves in the same direction as the second transport unit 8 in the second horizontal direction. The amount of movement at this time corresponds to the amount of movement of the second transport unit 8.
 紙幣Bが第3位置まで搬送されると、一時把持部93が紙幣Bを把持する。詳しくは、図16(C)、17(C)に示すように、上把持部931が下方へ、下把持部932が上方へ移動し、上把持部931及び下把持部932が大テープ輪L2の高さ方向略中央において紙幣Bを上下方向から挟持する。一時把持部93は、紙幣Bのうち、紙幣Bを大テープ輪L2内へ進入させたときの先頭側の部分であって、大テープ輪L2を越えた部分を把持している。 When the bill B is transported to the third position, the temporary gripping portion 93 grips the bill B. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 16C and 17C, the upper grip 931 moves downward and the lower grip 932 moves upward, and the upper grip 931 and the lower grip 932 move to the large tape ring L2. The banknote B is clamped from above and below in the approximate center in the height direction. Temporary gripping portion 93 grips a portion of banknote B that is on the leading side when banknote B is advanced into large tape ring L2 and beyond large tape ring L2.
 一時把持部93が紙幣Bを把持すると、第2搬送部8の把持ユニット81は、紙幣Bを放し、第2水平方向へ、紙幣Bを大テープ輪L2へ進入させたときとは反対向きに移動する。そして、把持ユニット81は、図18(A),19(A)に示すように、紙幣Bの結束予定部分(後の処理でテープTが巻き付けられる部分)以外の部分を把持し直す。 When the temporary gripping part 93 grips the banknote B, the gripping unit 81 of the second transport unit 8 releases the banknote B, in the second horizontal direction, in the direction opposite to that when the banknote B enters the large tape ring L2. Moving. Then, as shown in FIGS. 18 (A) and 19 (A), the gripping unit 81 grips a portion other than the portion to be bundled of the bills B (the portion around which the tape T is wound in the subsequent processing).
 続いて、クランプ部94が紙幣Bを集積方向へ、即ち、上下方向へ両側から押圧する。詳しくは、クランプ部94の下クランプ部943,944が上方へ移動する。それに伴い、把持ユニット81及び一時把持部93も上方へ移動する。このとき、可動上クランプ部942は、クランプ位置に位置している。最終的に、図18(B),19(B)に示すように、下クランプ部943,944は紙幣Bを上クランプ部941,942へ押し付ける。上クランプ部941,942及び下クランプ部943,944は、紙幣Bの長手方向において、紙幣Bの結束予定部分の両側を上下方向から挟持する。こうして、紙幣Bは、上クランプ部941,942と下クランプ部943,944とで上下方向から圧縮される。上昇する下クランプ部943,944は、上クランプ部941,942及び下クランプ部943,944が紙幣Bを所定の厚みまで圧縮する位置で停止する。尚、上クランプ部941,942と下クランプ部943,944とが紙幣Bを押圧するときには、把持ユニット81及び一時把持部93による把持は解除されている。 Subsequently, the clamp unit 94 presses the banknote B in the stacking direction, that is, in the vertical direction from both sides. Specifically, the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 of the clamp portion 94 move upward. Along with this, the gripping unit 81 and the temporary gripping portion 93 also move upward. At this time, the movable upper clamp portion 942 is located at the clamp position. Finally, as shown in FIGS. 18B and 19B, the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 press the bill B against the upper clamp portions 941 and 942. The upper clamp portions 941 and 942 and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 sandwich both sides of the bill B in the longitudinal direction of the bill B from above and below. Thus, the banknote B is compressed from above and below by the upper clamp portions 941 and 942 and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944. The lower clamp parts 943 and 944 that rise are stopped at positions where the upper clamp parts 941 and 942 and the lower clamp parts 943 and 944 compress the bill B to a predetermined thickness. When the upper clamp portions 941 and 942 and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 press the bill B, the gripping by the gripping unit 81 and the temporary gripping portion 93 is released.
 また、下クランプ部943,944は、下ガイド部926と一体的に構成されているので、図18(B),19(B)に示すように、下ガイド部926も下クランプ部943,944の上昇に伴って上方へ移動する。このとき、送り出しローラ対920は、下ガイド部926の上昇に連動して、テープTを引き戻す。その結果、図20に示すように、下ガイド部926の上昇に伴って、テープ輪Lが小さくなる。それに加えて、第2側方ガイド部928も、下ガイド部926の上昇に連動して上昇する。これにより、テープ輪Lが変形できるスペースを確保することができる。つまり、下ガイド部926の上昇がテープ輪Lが小さくなる速度に対して速すぎる場合には、テープ輪Lがガイド部925からはみ出すように変形する。このとき、第2側方ガイド部928は、テープ輪Lの側方から退避しているので、テープ輪Lは、もともと第2側方ガイド部928が位置していたスペースの方へ膨らむことができる。これにより、テープTが折れ曲がることを防止することができる。 Further, since the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are integrally formed with the lower guide portion 926, as shown in FIGS. 18B and 19B, the lower guide portion 926 is also lower clamp portions 943 and 944. It moves upward with the rise. At this time, the feed roller pair 920 pulls back the tape T in conjunction with the ascent of the lower guide portion 926. As a result, as shown in FIG. 20, the tape ring L becomes smaller as the lower guide portion 926 rises. In addition, the second side guide portion 928 also rises in conjunction with the rise of the lower guide portion 926. Thereby, the space which can deform | transform the tape ring L is securable. That is, when the rise of the lower guide portion 926 is too fast with respect to the speed at which the tape ring L becomes smaller, the tape ring L is deformed so as to protrude from the guide portion 925. At this time, since the second side guide portion 928 is retracted from the side of the tape ring L, the tape ring L may swell toward the space where the second side guide portion 928 was originally located. it can. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the tape T from being bent.
 ここで、可動上クランプ部942の第1当接部942aと第2当接部942bとの間には、第3当接部942cが設けられ、第3当接部942cは、第1及び第2当接部942a,942bよりも低い位置に位置している。また、固定上クランプ部941の第1当接部941aと第2当接部941bとの間には、テープ把持部921のベース板922aが配置され、ベース板922aは、第1及び第2当接部941a,941bよりも低い位置に位置している。一方、下クランプ部943,944においては、第1当接部943aと第2当接部943bとの間、及び、第1当接部944aと第2当接部944bとの間には下方に窪んだスペースが形成されている。そのため、クランプ部94により押圧された紙幣Bは、短手方向の略中央部が下方に凹んだ形状となっている。 Here, a third abutting portion 942c is provided between the first abutting portion 942a and the second abutting portion 942b of the movable upper clamp portion 942, and the third abutting portion 942c includes the first and second abutting portions 942c. It is located at a position lower than the two contact portions 942a and 942b. Further, the base plate 922a of the tape gripping portion 921 is disposed between the first contact portion 941a and the second contact portion 941b of the fixed upper clamp portion 941, and the base plate 922a has the first and second contact portions. It is located at a position lower than the contact portions 941a and 941b. On the other hand, in the lower clamp portions 943 and 944, the first clamp portion 943a and the second contact portion 943b are disposed downward, and the first clamp portion 944a and the second contact portion 944b are disposed downward. A recessed space is formed. Therefore, the bill B pressed by the clamp portion 94 has a shape in which a substantially central portion in the short direction is recessed downward.
 下ガイド部926の上昇は、下クランプ部943,944の上昇と共に停止する。一方、送り出しローラ対920によるテープTの引き戻しは、下ガイド部926の上昇が停止した後も継続される。最終的に、図18(C),19(C)に示すように、テープTが紙幣Bに巻き付けられる。ここで、前述の如く、テープTは、紙幣Bに巻き付けられる直前まで下ガイド部926の側壁926a,926aにより幅方向の位置が規制されている。そのため、テープTは、紙幣の結束予定部分に正確に巻き付けられる。 The rising of the lower guide part 926 stops with the rising of the lower clamp parts 943, 944. On the other hand, the return of the tape T by the feed roller pair 920 continues even after the lower guide portion 926 stops moving up. Finally, the tape T is wound around the bill B as shown in FIGS. Here, as described above, the position of the tape T in the width direction is regulated by the side walls 926a and 926a of the lower guide portion 926 until just before being wound around the bill B. Therefore, the tape T is accurately wound around the planned binding portion of the banknotes.
  -テープの接合、切断及び押印-
 続いて、ヒータ95がテープT同士を接合すると共に、カッタ96がテープTを切断する。それに加えて、押印部98がテープTに押印する。図21は、テープTの接合、切断及び押印の説明図であり、(A)は、第1及び第2テープ押えがテープを押さえた状態を示し、(B)は、ヒータがテープを溶着し、カッタがテープを切断した状態を示す。
-Joining, cutting and stamping tape-
Subsequently, the heater 95 joins the tapes T, and the cutter 96 cuts the tapes T. In addition, the stamp portion 98 stamps the tape T. FIG. 21 is an explanatory view of joining, cutting and stamping of the tape T, (A) shows a state where the first and second tape pressers are pressing the tape, and (B) is a case where the heater welds the tape. , Shows a state in which the cutter has cut the tape.
 テープTの紙幣Bへの巻き付けが完了すると、ヒータ95とカッタ96とは一緒に下降する。このとき、第1及び第2テープ押え991,992もヒータ95及びカッタ96と共に下降する。 When the winding of the tape T around the bill B is completed, the heater 95 and the cutter 96 descend together. At this time, the first and second tape pressers 991 and 992 are also lowered together with the heater 95 and the cutter 96.
 まず、図21(A)に示すように、第1テープ押え991がベース板922aの第1凹溝922cに嵌まり、第1凹溝922cの底壁との間でテープTを挟持する。それと共に、第2テープ押え992が、可動部923の押え部923bの上面との間でテープTを挟持する。このとき、ヒータ95による溶着とカッタ96による切断は行われていない。 First, as shown in FIG. 21A, the first tape retainer 991 is fitted into the first concave groove 922c of the base plate 922a, and the tape T is sandwiched between the bottom wall of the first concave groove 922c. At the same time, the second tape presser 992 holds the tape T between the upper surface of the presser part 923 b of the movable part 923. At this time, welding by the heater 95 and cutting by the cutter 96 are not performed.
 続いて、図21(B)に示すように、ヒータ95は、テープTの先端部と一周したテープTとが重なり合った部分とをテープ把持部921のベース板922aとの間で挟み込む。詳しくは、ヒータ95は、ベース板922aのうち第1凹溝922cと第2凹溝922dとの間の部分でテープTを挟持する。ヒータ95は、重なり合ったテープT同士を熱によって溶着させる。 Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 21B, the heater 95 sandwiches the portion where the tip of the tape T overlaps the tape T with the base plate 922a of the tape gripping portion 921. Specifically, the heater 95 sandwiches the tape T at a portion between the first concave groove 922c and the second concave groove 922d in the base plate 922a. The heater 95 welds the overlapping tapes T by heat.
 ヒータ95による熱溶着と並行して、カッタ96は、テープTを切断する。カッタ96は、テープTのうち、ヒータ95による溶着部分よりも上流側、即ち、溶着部分よりも送り出しローラ対920側の部分(以下、「余剰部分」という)を切断する。カッタ96は、ガイド片96aが第1及び第2ガイド部923c,923dに案内されて、第2凹溝922d内へ進入する。具体的には、一方のガイド片96aは、第1ガイド部923cと取付板923aとの間のガイド溝923eに案内され、他方のガイド片96aは、第2ガイド部923dの端面によって案内される。カッタ96は、第2凹溝922d内に進入するものの、第2凹溝922dの底面に接触しない位置で停止する。ベース板922a上のヒータ95と可動部923との間の部分には、テープTの余剰部分の下方にテープTの先端部、即ち、紙幣Bを結束している部分が存在している。カッタ96の切断刃は、鋸刃状に形成され、微小な凹凸を有する。カッタ96が第2凹溝922dに進入したときには、カッタ96の切断刃のうち凸状の部分は、テープTの余剰部分及び先端部の両方を貫通するものの、切断刃のうち凹状の部分は、テープTの余剰部分だけを貫通し、先端部を貫通していない。そのため、テープTの余剰部分は、カッタ96により完全に切断される。一方、テープTの先端部は、切断刃の凸状の部分が貫通するだけで、切断されない。テープTの先端部には、複数の小孔によるミシン目が形成される。 In parallel with the thermal welding by the heater 95, the cutter 96 cuts the tape T. The cutter 96 cuts a portion of the tape T upstream of the welded portion by the heater 95, that is, a portion on the feed roller pair 920 side of the welded portion (hereinafter referred to as “surplus portion”). In the cutter 96, the guide piece 96a is guided by the first and second guide portions 923c and 923d, and enters the second concave groove 922d. Specifically, one guide piece 96a is guided in a guide groove 923e between the first guide portion 923c and the mounting plate 923a, and the other guide piece 96a is guided by an end surface of the second guide portion 923d. . The cutter 96 enters the second concave groove 922d, but stops at a position where it does not contact the bottom surface of the second concave groove 922d. In the portion between the heater 95 and the movable portion 923 on the base plate 922a, a tip portion of the tape T, that is, a portion that binds the bills B is present below the surplus portion of the tape T. The cutting blade of the cutter 96 is formed in a saw blade shape and has minute irregularities. When the cutter 96 enters the second concave groove 922d, the convex portion of the cutting blade of the cutter 96 penetrates both the excess portion and the tip portion of the tape T, but the concave portion of the cutting blade is Only the excess part of the tape T is penetrated, and the tip part is not penetrated. Therefore, the excess portion of the tape T is completely cut by the cutter 96. On the other hand, the tip portion of the tape T is not cut only by the convex portion of the cutting blade passing therethrough. A perforation with a plurality of small holes is formed at the tip of the tape T.
 こうして、紙幣Bに巻き付けられたテープT同士が接合され、テープTの余剰部分が切断される。紙幣Bを結束するテープTには前記ミシン目が形成されているので、テープTを取り除く際にはテープTをミシン目において容易に切断することができる。 Thus, the tapes T wound around the banknote B are joined together, and the excess portion of the tape T is cut. Since the perforations are formed on the tape T that binds the bills B, the tape T can be easily cut at the perforations when the tape T is removed.
 ここで、下降するカッタ96を第1及び第2ガイド部923c,923dによって案内することによって、カッタ96自体の形状誤差や組付誤差等があったとしてもカッタ96が可動部923に干渉してしまうことを防止し、第2凹溝922dへ適切に進入させることができる。また、第2凹溝922dを設けることによって、カッタ96自体の形状誤差や組付誤差等があったとしてもカッタ96とベース板922aとの接触を防止することができる。これらにより、カッタ96の耐久性を向上させることができる。 Here, by guiding the lowering cutter 96 by the first and second guide portions 923c and 923d, the cutter 96 interferes with the movable portion 923 even if there is a shape error or an assembly error of the cutter 96 itself. Can be prevented, and can appropriately enter the second concave groove 922d. Further, by providing the second concave groove 922d, contact between the cutter 96 and the base plate 922a can be prevented even if there is a shape error or assembly error of the cutter 96 itself. As a result, the durability of the cutter 96 can be improved.
 テープTの接合及び切断が完了すると、ヒータ95、カッタ96、第1テープ押え991及び第2テープ押え992が上昇する。このとき、第1テープ押え991は、ヒータ95がテープTから離反した後もしばらくはテープTを第1凹溝922cの底壁との間で挟持している。テープTの溶着直後は溶着部が固まっていないので、溶着部に負荷が作用すると、溶着不良を引き起こす虞がある。ヒータ95がテープTから離反した後に第1テープ押え991によるテープTの押えを維持することによって、溶着部が凝固する最中に溶着部に作用する負荷を低減することができる。 When the joining and cutting of the tape T are completed, the heater 95, the cutter 96, the first tape press 991, and the second tape press 992 are raised. At this time, the first tape press 991 holds the tape T between the bottom wall of the first concave groove 922c for a while after the heater 95 is separated from the tape T. Immediately after the tape T is welded, the welded portion is not solidified, and if a load acts on the welded portion, there is a risk of causing poor welding. By maintaining the press of the tape T by the first tape press 991 after the heater 95 is separated from the tape T, it is possible to reduce the load acting on the welded portion while the welded portion is solidified.
 さらに、押印部98は、ヒータ95による溶着及びカッタ96による切断と並行して、テープTに押印を行う。押印部98は、下ガイド部926と共に上昇しており、テープTの溶着及び切断時には紙幣Bの直下に位置している。送り出しローラ対920によりテープTを引き戻してテープTを紙幣Bに巻き付けた後、押印部98は、スタンプ981を上昇させる。スタンプ981は、紙幣Bに巻き付けられたテープTに当接し、該テープTに押印する。 Further, the stamping portion 98 stamps the tape T in parallel with the welding with the heater 95 and the cutting with the cutter 96. The stamp part 98 is raised together with the lower guide part 926 and is located immediately below the bill B when the tape T is welded and cut. After the tape T is pulled back by the delivery roller pair 920 and the tape T is wound around the bill B, the stamping unit 98 raises the stamp 981. The stamp 981 abuts on the tape T wound around the banknote B and stamps on the tape T.
 ここで、紙幣Bは、図18(C),19(C)に示すように、クランプ部94により圧縮されている。つまり、紙幣Bは、クランプ部94により固定されている。また、第2搬送部8は、紙幣Bを決まった位置に搬送するので、紙幣Bの位置決めもなされている。このように位置が定まった紙幣Bに対してテープTが巻き付けられているので、テープTの位置も概ね決まっている。つまり、クランプ部94で紙幣Bを圧縮してテープTを該紙幣Bに巻き付けた状態においては、テープTの位置がわかっているので、紙幣Bの位置やテープTの位置を別途検知しなくても、テープTの正確な位置に押印することができる。 Here, the bill B is compressed by the clamp portion 94 as shown in FIGS. 18 (C) and 19 (C). That is, the bill B is fixed by the clamp portion 94. Moreover, since the 2nd conveyance part 8 conveys the banknote B to the fixed position, the positioning of the banknote B is also made | formed. Since the tape T is wound around the banknote B whose position is determined in this way, the position of the tape T is generally determined. That is, in the state where the bill B is compressed by the clamp portion 94 and the tape T is wound around the bill B, the position of the tape T is known, so that the position of the bill B and the position of the tape T are not separately detected. Can also be stamped at the exact position of the tape T.
 また、押印部98は、テープTの幅方向位置を規制する下ガイド部926と一体的に構成されているので、スタンプ981は、テープTに対して位置決めされている。詳しくは、下ガイド部926の底壁926bの貫通孔926dを貫通し、側壁926a,926aの間においてテープTに押印する。紙幣Bの下面に巻き付けられたテープTは、側壁926a,926aによりテープ幅方向の位置が規制されているので、スタンプ981が、側壁926a,926aの間を通って上昇した先にはテープTが位置している。こうして、スタンプ981は、テープTからはみ出すことなく押印する。 In addition, since the stamp portion 98 is integrally formed with the lower guide portion 926 that regulates the position in the width direction of the tape T, the stamp 981 is positioned with respect to the tape T. Specifically, the tape T passes through the through hole 926d of the bottom wall 926b of the lower guide portion 926 and is stamped on the tape T between the side walls 926a and 926a. Since the position of the tape T wound around the lower surface of the banknote B in the tape width direction is regulated by the side walls 926a and 926a, the tape T is placed at the point where the stamp 981 rises between the side walls 926a and 926a. positioned. Thus, the stamp 981 is stamped without protruding from the tape T.
 また、テープTの長手方向において、スタンプ981が押印する部分に印字部97により印字された文字又は符号が位置していたとしても、スタンプ981が押印する部分と印字部97が印字する位と部分とはテープ幅方向にずれているため、スタンプ981による印字と印字部97による印字とが重なり合うことはない。 Further, in the longitudinal direction of the tape T, even if the character or code printed by the printing unit 97 is located at the portion where the stamp 981 is imprinted, the portion where the stamp 981 is imprinted and the position where the printing portion 97 is printed Is shifted in the tape width direction, the printing by the stamp 981 and the printing by the printing unit 97 do not overlap.
 さらに、紙幣Bの集積方向の一方側にヒータ95及びカッタ96が配置され、該集積方向の他方側に押印部98が配置されているので、ヒータ95及びカッタ96の配設スペースと押印部98の配設スペースとをそれぞれ確保することができる。つまり、ヒータ95、カッタ96及び押印部98を紙幣Bの集積方向における片側に配置すると、スペースが限られているので、配置の自由度が大きく制限される。それに対し、ヒータ95及びカッタ96と押印部98とを紙幣Bの集積方向の両側に分けて配置することによって、それぞれの配設スペースを確保して、配置の自由度を高めることができる。また、紙幣Bの集積方向の一方側で接合処理又は/及び切断処理を行いつつ、紙幣Bの集積方向の他方側で押印処理を行うことができる。 Furthermore, the heater 95 and the cutter 96 are arranged on one side in the stacking direction of the bills B, and the stamping part 98 is arranged on the other side in the stacking direction. Therefore, the arrangement space of the heater 95 and the cutter 96 and the stamping part 98 are arranged. Can be secured. That is, when the heater 95, the cutter 96, and the stamping portion 98 are arranged on one side in the stacking direction of the bills B, the space is limited, and thus the degree of freedom of arrangement is greatly limited. On the other hand, by arranging the heater 95 and the cutter 96 and the stamp part 98 separately on both sides in the stacking direction of the bills B, it is possible to secure the respective arrangement spaces and increase the degree of freedom of arrangement. Further, the stamping process can be performed on the other side in the stacking direction of the bills B while performing the joining process or / and the cutting process on one side in the stacking direction of the bills B.
  -紙幣の排出-
 テープTにより結束された結束紙幣Bは、第2搬送部8及び第3搬送部10により投出部11まで搬送される。図22に、紙幣Bの厚み方向を向いて見たときの、結束紙幣Bが投出部11へ投出されるまでの各部の動作説明図を示す。図23に、紙幣Bの短手方向を向いて見たときの、結束紙幣Bが投出部11へ投出されるまでの各部の動作説明図を示す。図22,23において、(A)は、結束紙幣Bを第2水平方向へ抜き出した状態であり、(B)は、第3搬送部10が結束紙幣Bを把持した状態である。図22の(C)は、第3搬送部10が結束紙幣Bを投出部11まで搬送した状態である。尚、図22においては、上把持部931、固定上クランプ部941及び可動上クランプ部942の図示を省略している。
-Banknote discharge-
The bound banknotes B bound by the tape T are transported to the dispensing unit 11 by the second transport unit 8 and the third transport unit 10. FIG. 22 shows an operation explanatory diagram of each part until the bundled banknote B is thrown out to the throwing-out section 11 when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote B. In FIG. 23, the operation explanatory view of each part until the bundled banknote B is thrown into the throwing-out part 11 when it looks in the transversal direction of the banknote B is shown. 22 and 23, (A) is a state in which the bundled banknotes B are extracted in the second horizontal direction, and (B) is a state in which the third transport unit 10 grips the bundled banknotes B. FIG. 22C shows a state in which the third transport unit 10 transports the bundled banknote B to the dispensing unit 11. In FIG. 22, the upper gripping portion 931, the fixed upper clamp portion 941, and the movable upper clamp portion 942 are not shown.
 テープTの接合、切断及び押印が完了すると、把持ユニット81が結束紙幣Bを把持する。続いて、下クランプ部943,944が下降して、クランプ部94による押圧が解除される。尚、一時把持部93の下把持部932も少し下降する。それに加えて、可動上クランプ部942が上昇する。その後、第2搬送部8は、図22(A),23(A)に示すように、結束紙幣Bを第2水平方向へ、紙幣を大テープ輪L2へ搬送したときとは反対側へ所定量だけ搬送する。詳しくは、テープTにより紙幣Bを結束する際に、テープ把持部921がテープTの先端部を把持しており、テープ把持部921のベース板922aは、図21に示すように、テープTと紙幣Bとの間に入り込んだ状態となっている。そのため、第2搬送部8は、ベース板922aがテープTと紙幣Bとの間から抜け出るまで、結束紙幣Bを第2水平方向へ移動させる。 When the joining, cutting and stamping of the tape T are completed, the gripping unit 81 grips the bundled banknote B. Subsequently, the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are lowered, and the pressing by the clamp portion 94 is released. Note that the lower grip 932 of the temporary grip 93 is also slightly lowered. In addition, the movable upper clamp portion 942 rises. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 22 (A) and 23 (A), the second transport unit 8 is placed on the side opposite to the time when the bundled banknote B is transported in the second horizontal direction and the banknote is transported to the large tape loop L2. Transport only a fixed amount. Specifically, when the banknotes B are bound by the tape T, the tape gripping portion 921 grips the leading end portion of the tape T, and the base plate 922a of the tape gripping portion 921 is connected to the tape T as shown in FIG. It is in a state of entering between the bills B. Therefore, the second transport unit 8 moves the bundled bills B in the second horizontal direction until the base plate 922a comes out from between the tape T and the bills B.
 ここで、テープTよりも、第2水平方向における結束紙幣Bを引き出す側には、可動上クランプ部942が位置しており、可動上クランプ部942の第3当接部942cはテープTよりも低い位置に位置している。この状態のまま結束紙幣Bを第2水平方向へ引き出すと、テープTが第3当接部942cに干渉してしまう。そのため、結束紙幣Bを第2水平方向へ引き出す際には、第3当接部942cがテープTよりも高くなるまで可動上クランプ部942が上昇する。これにより、テープTが第3当接部942cに接触することなく、結束紙幣Bが第2水平方向へ引き出される。第2搬送部8は、ベース板922aがテープTと紙幣Bとの間から抜け出る量だけ結束紙幣Bを移動させると、結束紙幣Bの搬送を停止する。 Here, the movable upper clamp portion 942 is located on the side where the bundled banknotes B are pulled out in the second horizontal direction from the tape T, and the third contact portion 942c of the movable upper clamp portion 942 is more than the tape T. Located in a low position. When the bundled banknote B is pulled out in the second horizontal direction in this state, the tape T interferes with the third contact portion 942c. Therefore, when the bundled banknote B is pulled out in the second horizontal direction, the movable upper clamp portion 942 is raised until the third contact portion 942c becomes higher than the tape T. Accordingly, the bundled banknotes B are pulled out in the second horizontal direction without the tape T contacting the third contact portion 942c. The 2nd conveyance part 8 will stop conveyance of the bundled banknote B, if the base board 922a moves the bundled banknote B by the amount which comes out from between the tape T and the banknote B.
 尚、クランプ部94による紙幣Bの押圧が解除されたときには、紙幣Bは、把持ユニット81とベース板922aとで支持されている。把持ユニット81が把持する部分は、紙幣Bの長手方向の一端部なので、ベース板922aには紙幣Bの自重の大部分が作用する。ベース板922aはテープTの接合部分の下方に位置しているので、テープTの接合部分にも紙幣Bの自重の大部分が作用する。そのため、ヒータ95によるテープTの接合が不十分な場合等には、クランプ部94による紙幣Bの押圧が解除されたときにテープTの接合部分が引き離される虞がある。その場合、テープTは、下方に落下する。ここで、テープTを紙幣Bに巻き付け、該テープTの結合及び切断を行うまでの間、下ガイド部926がテープTの下方であってテープTから離れた位置に位置している。そのため、下方へ落下したテープTは、下ガイド部926に受け止められる。そして、制御部120は、少なくともクランプ部94による紙幣Bの押圧が解除されたときには、第3テープセンサ926eにより下ガイド部926上のテープTの有無を監視している。そのため、テープTが下ガイド部926上に落下したときには、第3テープセンサ926eがテープTの存在を検知することをもってテープTの落下を検知する。制御部120は、第3テープセンサ926eがテープTの落下を検知したときには、タッチパネル17等を介してその旨をオペレータに報知する。 In addition, when the press of the banknote B by the clamp part 94 is cancelled | released, the banknote B is supported by the holding | grip unit 81 and the base board 922a. Since the portion gripped by the gripping unit 81 is one end in the longitudinal direction of the bill B, most of the weight of the bill B acts on the base plate 922a. Since the base plate 922a is located below the joining portion of the tape T, most of the weight of the bill B acts also on the joining portion of the tape T. Therefore, when the joining of the tape T by the heater 95 is insufficient, the joining portion of the tape T may be pulled away when the press of the bill B by the clamp portion 94 is released. In that case, the tape T falls downward. Here, the lower guide portion 926 is positioned below the tape T and away from the tape T until the tape T is wound around the bill B and the tape T is joined and cut. Therefore, the tape T that has dropped downward is received by the lower guide portion 926. And the control part 120 is monitoring the presence or absence of the tape T on the lower guide part 926 by the 3rd tape sensor 926e at least, when the press of the banknote B by the clamp part 94 is cancelled | released. Therefore, when the tape T falls on the lower guide portion 926, the third tape sensor 926e detects the fall of the tape T by detecting the presence of the tape T. When the third tape sensor 926e detects a drop of the tape T, the control unit 120 notifies the operator via the touch panel 17 or the like.
 次に、把持ユニット81は、図22(B),23(B)に示すように、結束紙幣Bの把持を解除する。代わりに、第3搬送部10が結束紙幣Bを把持する。詳しくは、下クランプ部943,944が所定の高さ位置まで下降する。この高さ位置は、投出部11の高さに対応している。それと共に、下把持部932も、下クランプ部943,944と同じ高さまで下降する。第2搬送部8は、結束紙幣Bを下クランプ部943,944の高さまで移動させ、把持ユニット81の把持を解除する。このとき、下アーム部81bの高さは、下クランプ部943,944の高さと一致している。つまり、結束紙幣Bは、下アーム部81b及び下クランプ部943,944上に載置された状態となる。その後、第3搬送部10が結束紙幣Bを把持する。 Next, as shown in FIGS. 22 (B) and 23 (B), the holding unit 81 releases the holding of the bundled bills B. Instead, the third transport unit 10 grips the bundled banknote B. Specifically, the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are lowered to a predetermined height position. This height position corresponds to the height of the dispensing unit 11. At the same time, the lower grip portion 932 is lowered to the same height as the lower clamp portions 943 and 944. The second transport unit 8 moves the bundled banknote B to the height of the lower clamp units 943 and 944 and releases the grip of the grip unit 81. At this time, the height of the lower arm portion 81b matches the height of the lower clamp portions 943, 944. That is, the bundled banknote B is placed on the lower arm part 81b and the lower clamp parts 943, 944. Thereafter, the third transport unit 10 holds the bundled banknote B.
 続いて、第3搬送部10が、結束紙幣Bを第1水平方向へ投出部11に向かって搬送する。このとき、第2搬送部8の下アーム部81b及び下クランプ部943,944が結束紙幣Bを下方から支えており、結束紙幣Bが投出部11まで搬送される際のガイドとして機能する。第3搬送部10は、結束紙幣Bが投出部11に近づくと、該結束紙幣Bの把持を徐々に解除する。最終的に、結束紙幣Bは、第3搬送部10により投出部11へ押し出される。 Subsequently, the third transport unit 10 transports the bundled banknote B toward the dispensing unit 11 in the first horizontal direction. At this time, the lower arm portion 81 b and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 of the second transport unit 8 support the bundled bill B from below, and function as a guide when the bundled bill B is transported to the dispensing unit 11. When the bundled banknote B approaches the dispensing unit 11, the third transport unit 10 gradually releases the grip of the bundled banknote B. Finally, the bundled banknotes B are pushed out to the dispensing unit 11 by the third transport unit 10.
 投出部11へ押し出された結束紙幣は、投出部11を介して筐体12の外部へ投出される。 Bundled banknotes pushed out to the dispensing unit 11 are thrown out of the housing 12 through the dispensing unit 11.
 〈作業箇所誘導〉
 このように構成された紙幣処理装置100は、メンテナンスや集積された紙幣の回収等の作業をするにあたってオペレータを作業箇所へ誘導する機能を有している。メンテナンスの例としては、紙幣の詰まりやテープTの詰まりを解消したり、印字部97のインクリボン等の消耗部品を交換したり、押印部98にインクを補充したりすること等が挙げられる。紙幣の回収の例としては、結束スタッカ4からの紙幣の回収、非結束スタッカ5からの紙幣の回収、リジェクトスタッカ6からの紙幣の回収等が挙げられる。
<Work point guidance>
The bill processing apparatus 100 configured as described above has a function of guiding an operator to a work location when performing operations such as maintenance and collection of accumulated bills. Examples of maintenance include eliminating banknote jams and tape T jams, replacing consumable parts such as ink ribbons of the printing unit 97, and refilling the stamping unit 98 with ink. Examples of banknote collection include collection of banknotes from the binding stacker 4, collection of banknotes from the non-binding stacker 5, collection of banknotes from the reject stacker 6, and the like.
 紙幣処理装置100においては、筐体12のいくつかの部分が開閉可能に構成されており、紙幣処理装置100内部のメンテナンスを行うことができるように構成されている。 In the banknote processing apparatus 100, some parts of the housing | casing 12 are comprised so that opening and closing is possible, and it is comprised so that the maintenance inside the banknote processing apparatus 100 can be performed.
 具体的には、筐体12の第2側面124のうち略下半分には、下部カバー131が設けられている。下部カバー131には、非結束スタッカ5の第2取出口53及びタッチパネル17が設けられている。下部カバー131は、第1側面123と対向する第3側面125と第2側面124との稜部において上下方向に延びる軸回りに回動可能に構成されている。下部カバー131を開くことによって、第1処理部126が露出する。 Specifically, a lower cover 131 is provided in a substantially lower half of the second side surface 124 of the housing 12. The lower cover 131 is provided with the second outlet 53 of the non-binding stacker 5 and the touch panel 17. The lower cover 131 is configured to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction at a ridge portion between the third side surface 125 and the second side surface 124 facing the first side surface 123. By opening the lower cover 131, the first processing unit 126 is exposed.
 上面121のうち第1側面123側の略半分と、第2側面124の略上半分であって且つ第1側面123側の略半分とには、結束部カバー132が設けられている。結束部カバー132は、第1側面123の方へスライド可能に構成されている。結束部カバー132をスライドさせることによって、結束部9が露出する。 A bundling portion cover 132 is provided on a substantially half of the upper surface 121 on the first side surface 123 side and a substantially upper half of the second side surface 124 and on the first side surface 123 side. The binding unit cover 132 is configured to be slidable toward the first side surface 123. The binding unit 9 is exposed by sliding the binding unit cover 132.
 上面121のうち第3側面125側の部分には、リールカバー133が設けられている。リールカバー133は、上面121と第3側面125との稜部において水平方向に延びる軸回りに回動可能に構成されている。リールカバー133を開くことによって、テープリール911が露出する。 A reel cover 133 is provided on a portion of the upper surface 121 on the third side surface 125 side. The reel cover 133 is configured to be rotatable around an axis extending in the horizontal direction at a ridge between the upper surface 121 and the third side surface 125. By opening the reel cover 133, the tape reel 911 is exposed.
 さらに、紙幣処理装置100の内部においては、いくつかの部分がユニットとして移動可能に構成されている。例えば、識別部3は、移動可能に構成されている。また、第1搬送部7の一部がユニット化されて、移動可能に構成されている。これらのユニットを移動させることによってそれらの奥のスペースのメンテナンスを容易に行うことができる。尚、これらのユニットは、適切な位置に配置された状態でロック可能に構成されており、ロックを解除することによって移動可能となっている。各カバーの開閉や、移動可能なユニットのロック状態は、制御部120によって検知される。 Furthermore, inside the banknote handling apparatus 100, some parts are configured to be movable as a unit. For example, the identification unit 3 is configured to be movable. Moreover, a part of the 1st conveyance part 7 is unitized, and it is comprised so that a movement is possible. By moving these units, the space behind them can be easily maintained. These units are configured so as to be locked in a state where they are arranged at appropriate positions, and can be moved by releasing the lock. The controller 120 detects the opening / closing of each cover and the locked state of the movable unit.
 制御部120は、メンテナンスや紙幣の回収等の作業の必要性を検知するように構成されている。例えば、制御部120は、各種のセンサによって、紙幣詰まり、テープ詰まり、消耗部品の交換・補充の必要性、紙幣の回収の必要性等を検知するように構成されている。図24は、紙幣処理装置100における作業の必要性を検知する箇所を示す図である。紙幣処理装置100は、取込ローラ23の周辺領域R1における紙幣詰まり、識別部3の周辺領域R2における紙幣詰まり、主搬送路71のうち識別部3と第1分岐路72aとの間の区間R3における紙幣詰まり、第1分岐路72aの区間R4における紙幣詰まり、主搬送路71のうち第2分岐路72bと第3分岐路72cとの間の区間R5における紙幣詰まり、主搬送路71のうち第3分岐路72cと第4分岐路72dとの間の区間R6における紙幣詰まり、テープ搬送部912の区間R7におけるテープ詰まり、印字部97のインクリボンの消耗、押印部98のインク不足、結束スタッカ4の紙幣の集積、非結束スタッカ5の紙幣の集積、リジェクトスタッカ6の紙幣の集積を検知する。 The control unit 120 is configured to detect the necessity of work such as maintenance and bill collection. For example, the control unit 120 is configured to detect bill jamming, tape jamming, necessity for replacement / replenishment of consumable parts, necessity for bill collection, and the like by various sensors. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating locations where the necessity of work in the banknote handling apparatus 100 is detected. The banknote handling apparatus 100 includes a banknote jam in the peripheral area R1 of the take-in roller 23, a banknote jam in the peripheral area R2 of the identification unit 3, and a section R3 between the identification unit 3 and the first branch path 72a in the main transport path 71. Banknote jam in the section R4 of the first branch path 72a, banknote jam in the section R5 between the second branch path 72b and the third branch path 72c of the main transport path 71, and the first of the main transport path 71. Bill jamming in the section R6 between the third branch path 72c and the fourth branch path 72d, tape jamming in the section R7 of the tape transport section 912, consumption of the ink ribbon in the printing section 97, ink shortage in the stamp section 98, bundling stacker 4 Banknotes, non-bundling stacker 5 banknotes, and reject stacker 6 banknotes are detected.
 制御部120は、前記の作業の必要性を検知すると、オペレータへの誘導を行う。具体的には、制御部120は、タッチパネル17に作業手順をアニメーション等により表示すると共に、筐体12内部の作業箇所をLEDにより照射する。筐体12内部の作業箇所の近傍にはLEDが設けられている。尚、光源は、LEDに限られるものではない。 When the control unit 120 detects the necessity of the above work, the control unit 120 guides the operator. Specifically, the control unit 120 displays the work procedure on the touch panel 17 by animation or the like, and irradiates the work location inside the housing 12 with the LED. An LED is provided in the vicinity of the work location inside the housing 12. The light source is not limited to the LED.
 例えば、主搬送路71のうち識別部3と第1分岐路72aとの間における紙幣詰まりに対する作業を誘導するときには、タッチパネル17には、下部カバー131を開かせる作業の指示、第1及び第2非結束スタッカ5A,5Bのユニットのロックを解除させる作業の指示、主搬送路71の一部のユニットを移動させる作業の指示、紙幣を取り除かせる作業の指示、主搬送路71の一部のユニットを元に戻させる作業の指示、第1及び第2非結束スタッカ5A,5Bのユニットを元に戻させる作業の指示、下部カバー131を閉じさせる作業の指示が順次表示される。制御部120は、タッチパネル17への作業の表示に連動して、筐体12内部の作業箇所をLEDで照射する。具体的には、下部カバー131が開かれると、制御部120は、ロック解除を行う第2非結束スタッカ5BのユニットをLEDで照射する。該ユニットのロックが解除されると、制御部120は、該LEDを消灯し、主搬送路71の一部のユニットをLEDで照射する。該ユニットが移動させられると、制御部120は、該LEDを消灯し、紙幣が詰まっている箇所、即ち、紙幣詰まりを検知したセンサの周辺をLEDで照射する。紙幣詰まりが解消されると、制御部120は、該LEDを消灯し、主搬送路71の一部のユニットをLEDで照射する。該ユニットが元に戻されると、制御部120は、該LEDを消灯し、第2非結束スタッカ5BのユニットをLEDで照射する。該ユニットが元に戻されると、制御部120は、該LEDを消灯する。 For example, when guiding a work for banknote jam in the main transport path 71 between the identification unit 3 and the first branch path 72a, the touch panel 17 includes instructions for opening the lower cover 131, the first and second instructions. Instructions for unlocking the units of the non-binding stackers 5A and 5B, instructions for moving parts of the main transport path 71, instructions for removing bills, and some units of the main transport path 71 The operation instruction for returning the unit, the operation instruction for returning the units of the first and second non-bundling stackers 5A and 5B, and the operation instruction for closing the lower cover 131 are sequentially displayed. The control unit 120 irradiates the work location inside the housing 12 with the LED in conjunction with the display of the work on the touch panel 17. Specifically, when the lower cover 131 is opened, the control unit 120 irradiates the unit of the second non-binding stacker 5B that performs unlocking with the LED. When the lock of the unit is released, the control unit 120 turns off the LED and irradiates a part of the main transport path 71 with the LED. When the unit is moved, the control unit 120 turns off the LED, and irradiates the area where the banknote is jammed, that is, the periphery of the sensor that detects the banknote jam, with the LED. When the banknote jam is resolved, the control unit 120 turns off the LED and irradiates a part of the main conveyance path 71 with the LED. When the unit is returned to the original state, the control unit 120 turns off the LED and irradiates the unit of the second non-bundling stacker 5B with the LED. When the unit is returned to the original state, the control unit 120 turns off the LED.
 尚、LEDを発光させる際は、点灯でもよいし、点滅でもよい。また、作業ごとに異なる箇所をLEDで照射しているが、複数の作業が一まとまりの領域で行われる場合には、該領域に対応するLEDを継続して照射させてもよい。さらに、LEDの照射は、適宜省略してもよい。例えば、目的となる作業(例えば、紙幣詰まりの解消)を完了させた後、各ユニットを元に戻す作業時にはLEDの照射を省略して、タッチパネル17の表示だけにしてもよい。 In addition, when making LED light-emit, it may turn on and may blink. Moreover, although the location which is different for every operation | work is irradiated with LED, when a some operation | work is performed in a collective area | region, you may irradiate LED corresponding to this area | region continuously. Furthermore, you may abbreviate | omit irradiation of LED suitably. For example, after completing the target operation (for example, elimination of banknote jam), the LED irradiation may be omitted and only the display on the touch panel 17 may be performed during the operation of returning each unit.
 以上の説明では、主搬送路71のうち識別部3と第1分岐路72aとの間における紙幣詰まりに対する作業について説明したが、別の箇所に対する作業を誘導する際には、該作業に対応する手順でタッチパネル17での指示及びLEDの照射が行われる。 In the above description, the work for banknote jam in the main transport path 71 between the identification unit 3 and the first branch path 72a has been described. However, when the work for another part is guided, the work corresponds to the work. In the procedure, instructions on the touch panel 17 and LED irradiation are performed.
 〈まとめ〉
 したがって、紙幣処理装置100は、集積された紙幣をテープTで結束する紙葉類結束装置であって、集積された紙幣を集積方向の両側から圧縮するクランプ部94と、前記クランプ部94で圧縮した紙幣を前記テープTで結束する結束部9と、前記テープTに押印する押印部98とを備え、前記押印部98は、前記クランプ部94で前記紙幣を圧縮し且つ該紙幣に前記テープTを巻き付けた状態で該テープTに押印する。
<Summary>
Therefore, the banknote processing apparatus 100 is a paper sheet binding apparatus that binds the stacked banknotes with the tape T, and compresses the stacked banknotes from both sides in the stacking direction. A binding portion 9 for binding the banknotes with the tape T, and a stamping portion 98 for stamping the tape T. The stamping portion 98 compresses the banknotes with the clamp portion 94 and applies the tape T to the banknotes. Is stamped on the tape T.
 前記の構成によれば、紙幣を結束する際にクランプ部94によって紙幣を圧縮するので、紙幣の位置は定まっている。そして、位置が定まった紙幣に対してテープTが巻き付けられるので、該テープTの位置も概ね決まっている。つまり、紙幣をクランプ部94で圧縮した状態で結束する際にはテープTの位置がわかっているので、このタイミングで押印を行うことによってテープTに対して簡単且つ精度良く押印することができる。 According to the above configuration, since the banknote is compressed by the clamp portion 94 when the banknote is bound, the position of the banknote is fixed. And since the tape T is wound with respect to the banknote in which the position was settled, the position of this tape T is also generally decided. That is, since the position of the tape T is known when the banknotes are bundled in a state compressed by the clamp portion 94, the tape T can be easily and accurately stamped by performing the stamping at this timing.
 また、前記押印部98は、前記集積方向から押印する。 Also, the stamping part 98 stamps from the stacking direction.
 この場合、紙幣の圧縮方向から押印される。 In this case, it is stamped from the banknote compression direction.
 さらに、紙幣処理装置100は、前記テープTを前記紙幣に巻き付けた状態で該テープT同士を接合するヒータ95と、前記テープTを前記紙幣に巻き付けられていない位置で切断するカッタ96とを備え、前記ヒータ95及びカッタ96は、前記紙幣の前記集積方向の一方側に配置され、前記押印部98は、前記紙幣の前記集積方向の他方側に配置されている。 Furthermore, the banknote handling apparatus 100 includes a heater 95 that joins the tapes T with the tape T wrapped around the banknotes, and a cutter 96 that cuts the tape T at a position where the tapes T are not wrapped around the banknotes. The heater 95 and the cutter 96 are disposed on one side in the stacking direction of the banknotes, and the stamp portion 98 is disposed on the other side in the stacking direction of the banknotes.
 この構成によれば、ヒータ95及びカッタ96と押印部98とが紙幣の集積方向の両側に分けて配置されるので、ヒータ95及びカッタ96の配設スペースと押印部98の配設スペースとをそれぞれ確保することができる。 According to this configuration, since the heater 95 and the cutter 96 and the stamping portion 98 are separately arranged on both sides in the banknote stacking direction, the space for arranging the heater 95 and the cutter 96 and the space for arranging the stamping portion 98 are reduced. Each can be secured.
 また、紙幣処理装置100は、前記テープTを前記紙幣に巻き付けた状態で該テープT同士を接合するヒータ95と、前記テープTを前記紙幣に巻き付けられていない位置で切断するカッタ96とを備え、前記押印部98による押印処理の少なくとも一部は、前記ヒータ95による接合処理及び/又は前記カッタ96による切断処理と時間的に重複して行われる。 Moreover, the banknote processing apparatus 100 is provided with the heater 95 which joins this tape T in the state which wound the said tape T around the said banknote, and the cutter 96 which cut | disconnects the said tape T in the position which is not wound around the said banknote. At least a part of the stamping process by the stamping part 98 is performed in a time-overlapping manner with the joining process by the heater 95 and / or the cutting process by the cutter 96.
 前記の構成によれば、押印処理、接合処理及び切断処理を含む結束処理全体の処理時間を短縮することができる。 According to the above configuration, it is possible to shorten the processing time of the entire bundling process including the stamping process, the bonding process, and the cutting process.
 さらに、紙幣処理装置100は、前記テープTを前記紙幣に巻き付ける際に該テープTの幅方向の位置を規制する一対の側壁926a,926aを有するガイド部925を備え、前記押印部98は、前記一対の側壁926a,926aの間に配置されている。 Furthermore, the banknote handling apparatus 100 includes a guide portion 925 having a pair of side walls 926a and 926a that regulates the position of the tape T in the width direction when the tape T is wound around the banknote, and the stamp portion 98 includes It is arranged between the pair of side walls 926a, 926a.
 前記の構成によれば、テープTは、ガイド部925によってテープTの幅方向の位置が規制された状態で紙幣に巻き付けられる。そして、押印部98は、テープTの幅方向の位置を規制するガイド部925の一対の側壁926a,926aの間に配置されている。つまり、ガイド部925は、テープTの幅方向位置を実質的に押印部98による押印位置に対応するように規制している。その結果、テープTからはみ出すことなく正確に押印することができる。 According to the above configuration, the tape T is wound around the bill in a state where the position of the tape T in the width direction is regulated by the guide portion 925. And the stamp part 98 is arrange | positioned between the pair of side walls 926a and 926a of the guide part 925 which regulates the position of the width direction of the tape T. In other words, the guide portion 925 restricts the position in the width direction of the tape T so as to substantially correspond to the stamp position by the stamp portion 98. As a result, it is possible to accurately stamp without protruding from the tape T.
 また、紙幣処理装置100は、前記テープTに印字する印字部97を備え、前記押印部98及び前記印字部97は、該押印部98による押印の位置と該印字部97による印字とが前記テープTの幅方向にずれて互いに重なり合わないように配置されている。 Moreover, the banknote handling apparatus 100 includes a printing unit 97 that prints on the tape T, and the stamping unit 98 and the printing unit 97 include the position of the stamping by the stamping unit 98 and the printing by the printing unit 97 as the tape. They are arranged so as not to overlap each other by shifting in the width direction of T.
 前記の構成によれば、テープTに対して押印部98で押印する位置を正確に設定することができるので、押印部98による押印の位置と印字部97による印字とがテープTの幅方向にずれて互いに重なり合わないように押印部98による押印の位置を設定することができる。 According to the above-described configuration, the position where the stamping portion 98 is stamped on the tape T can be accurately set, so that the position of the stamping by the stamping portion 98 and the printing by the printing portion 97 are in the width direction of the tape T. The positions of the stamps by the stamp part 98 can be set so that they do not overlap and overlap each other.
 また、前記結束部9は、前記テープTでテープ輪Lを作成し、前記紙幣が該テープ輪Lの中に配置された後に該テープTを引き戻して該テープTを該紙幣に巻き付けるテープ輪作成部92を有し、前記テープ輪作成部92は、前記テープ輪Lを作成する際に前記テープTを送り出す送り出し部を有し、該テープ輪Lを該送り出し部よりも低い位置に形成する。 The bundling portion 9 creates a tape ring L with the tape T, and after the banknote is placed in the tape ring L, pulls back the tape T and winds the tape T around the banknote. The tape ring creating section 92 has a feeding section that feeds out the tape T when creating the tape loop L, and forms the tape ring L at a position lower than the feeding section.
 前記の構成によれば、テープ輪Lは、送り出し部の下方へ向かって膨らんでいき、最終的に送り出し部よりも低い位置にテープ輪Lが作成される。テープTは柔軟であるため、テープ輪Lを上向きに膨らませていくと、テープ輪Lの作成途中でテープ輪Lの一部がテープTの自重により下方へ撓んでしまう虞がある。それに対し、テープ輪Lを下向きに膨らませていく構成においては、テープ輪Lの作成途中でテープ輪Lが撓み難い。つまり、テープ輪Lを適切に作成することができる。 According to the above configuration, the tape ring L swells downward from the delivery part, and finally the tape ring L is created at a position lower than the delivery part. Since the tape T is flexible, if the tape ring L is inflated upward, a part of the tape ring L may be bent downward due to the weight of the tape T during the production of the tape ring L. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the tape ring L is inflated downward, the tape ring L is not easily bent during the production of the tape ring L. That is, the tape ring L can be appropriately created.
 《その他の実施形態》
 以上のように、本出願において開示する技術の例示として、前記実施形態を説明した。しかしながら、本開示における技術は、これに限定されず、適宜、変更、置き換え、付加、省略などを行った実施の形態にも適用可能である。また、前記実施形態で説明した各構成要素を組み合わせて、新たな実施の形態とすることも可能である。また、添付図面および詳細な説明に記載された構成要素の中には、課題解決のために必須な構成要素だけでなく、前記技術を例示するために、課題解決のためには必須でない構成要素も含まれ得る。そのため、それらの必須ではない構成要素が添付図面や詳細な説明に記載されていることをもって、直ちに、それらの必須ではない構成要素が必須であるとの認定をするべきではない。
<< Other Embodiments >>
As described above, the embodiment has been described as an example of the technique disclosed in the present application. However, the technology in the present disclosure is not limited to this, and can also be applied to an embodiment in which changes, replacements, additions, omissions, and the like are appropriately performed. Moreover, it is also possible to combine each component demonstrated by the said embodiment and it can also be set as a new embodiment. In addition, among the components described in the attached drawings and the detailed description, not only the components essential for solving the problem, but also the components not essential for solving the problem in order to illustrate the technology. May also be included. Therefore, it should not be immediately recognized that these non-essential components are essential as those non-essential components are described in the accompanying drawings and detailed description.
 前記実施形態について、以下のような構成としてもよい。 The above-described embodiment may be configured as follows.
 前記実施形態では、紙葉類結束装置の例として紙幣処理装置100について説明したが、紙葉類結束装置はこれに限られるものではない。例えば、紙葉類の識別、分配、集積は別の装置で行い、紙葉類結束装置は、集積された紙葉類がセットされ、該紙葉類の結束のみを行う装置であってもよい。また、紙葉類の例として紙幣について説明したが、紙葉類は紙幣に限られず、商品券等の金券であってもよい。 In the above embodiment, the banknote handling apparatus 100 has been described as an example of the paper sheet bundling apparatus, but the paper sheet bundling apparatus is not limited to this. For example, the identification, distribution, and accumulation of paper sheets may be performed by another apparatus, and the paper sheet bundling apparatus may be an apparatus that sets the accumulated paper sheets and only binds the paper sheets. . Moreover, although the banknote was demonstrated as an example of paper sheets, paper sheets are not restricted to a banknote, A cash voucher, such as a gift certificate, may be sufficient.
 前記紙幣処理装置100の構成は、一例であって、これに限られるものではない。例えば、紙幣処理装置100は、結束スタッカ4が2つ設けられ、非結束スタッカ5が2つ設けられ、リジェクトスタッカ6が1つ設けられているが、これらの個数はこれに限られるものではない。例えば、結束スタッカ4は、1つ又は3つ以上であってもよい。非結束スタッカ5は、1つ又は3つ以上であってもよい。リジェクトスタッカ6は、2以上であってもよい。あるいは、非結束スタッカ5及びリジェクトスタッカ6を省略してもよい。 The configuration of the banknote handling apparatus 100 is an example and is not limited thereto. For example, the banknote handling apparatus 100 includes two binding stackers 4, two non-binding stackers 5, and one reject stacker 6, but the number of these is not limited to this. . For example, the number of binding stackers 4 may be one or three or more. The number of non-binding stackers 5 may be one or three or more. The number of reject stackers 6 may be two or more. Alternatively, the non-binding stacker 5 and the reject stacker 6 may be omitted.
 また、実施形態では、取込口24、投出口111及びリジェクト取出口63が第1側面123に設けられ、第1取出口47、第2取出口53及びタッチパネル17が第2側面124に設けられているが、これは例示に過ぎない。 In the embodiment, the intake port 24, the outlet 111 and the reject outlet 63 are provided on the first side surface 123, and the first outlet 47, the second outlet 53, and the touch panel 17 are provided on the second side surface 124. However, this is only an example.
 また、前記紙幣処理装置100は、同一種類結束処理を行っているが、これに限られるものではない。例えば、紙幣処理装置100は、複数の種類の紙幣を結束対象として、異なる種類の紙幣を2つの結束スタッカ4,4に分けて集積し、結束スタッカ4ごとに該所定枚数集積した紙幣を結束部9により結束する複数種類結束処理を行ってもよい。つまり、第1結束スタッカ4Aに集積される紙幣と、第2結束スタッカ4Bに集積される紙幣とは種類が異なる。 Moreover, although the said banknote processing apparatus 100 is performing the same kind bundling process, it is not restricted to this. For example, the banknote processing apparatus 100 divides and stacks different types of banknotes into two binding stackers 4 and 4 for a plurality of types of banknotes as binding targets, and stacks the predetermined number of banknotes for each binding stacker 4. A plurality of types of bundling processes for bundling at 9 may be performed. That is, the banknotes stacked on the first binding stacker 4A and the banknotes stacked on the second binding stacker 4B are different in type.
 また、前記紙幣処理装置100は、複数の金種の紙幣が混在していたバラ状態の紙幣を処理しているが、これに限られるものではない。紙幣処理装置100は、所定の1種類の金種の紙幣を処理する構成であってもよい。 Moreover, although the said banknote processing apparatus 100 processes the banknote of the rose state in which the banknote of several denominations was mixed, it is not restricted to this. The banknote processing apparatus 100 may be configured to process banknotes of a predetermined one type of denomination.
 また、大テープ輪L2の作成の方法は、前記実施形態の方法に限られない。例えば、送り出しローラ対920がテープTを送り出しつつ、該テープTを大テープ輪L2の形状をしたガイドで案内することによって、大テープ輪L2を作成してもよい。また、送り出しローラ対920がテープTを送り出しつつ、該テープTを把持したアーム等の搬送部が該テープを大テープ輪L2の形状に沿って搬送することによって、大テープ輪L2を作成してもよい。さらに、大テープ輪L2の中に紙幣を搬送する構成ではなく、大テープ輪L2の一部だけ(例えば、半周だけ)が作成され、そこへ紙幣が搬送され、その後、テープが紙幣に巻き付けられる構成であってもよい。あるいは、テープ輪Lを予め作成することなく、所定の位置へ配置された紙幣にテープTを巻き付ける構成であってもよい。つまり、結束時に紙幣類がクランプ部94で圧縮される構成であれば、紙幣へのテープの巻き付け方はどのようなものでもよい。 Further, the method of creating the large tape ring L2 is not limited to the method of the above embodiment. For example, the large tape ring L2 may be created by guiding the tape T with a guide having the shape of the large tape ring L2 while the feeding roller pair 920 is feeding the tape T. In addition, while the feeding roller pair 920 feeds the tape T, a transport unit such as an arm that grips the tape T transports the tape along the shape of the large tape loop L2, thereby creating the large tape loop L2. Also good. Furthermore, it is not the structure which conveys a banknote in the large tape ring L2, Only a part (for example, only half circumference) of the large tape ring L2 is created, a banknote is conveyed there, and a tape is wound around a banknote after that. It may be a configuration. Or the structure which winds the tape T around the banknote arrange | positioned to the predetermined position, without creating the tape ring L previously may be sufficient. That is, as long as banknotes are compressed by the clamp part 94 at the time of bundling, what kind of thing may be used for winding the tape around the banknotes.
 また、前記実施形態では、紙幣Bの長手方向中央を結束しているが、これに限られるものではない。例えば、図25に示すように、テープTの端縁が紙幣Bの長手方向中央に位置するように紙幣Bを結束してもよい。この場合、図25(A)に示すように、第2搬送部8が紙幣Bを大テープ輪L2内へ搬送する量が調整される。すなわち、前記実施形態と比べて、紙幣Bの搬送量が少なくなる。ここで、一時把持部93の位置は、第2搬送部8による紙幣の大テープ輪L2内への挿入量(即ち、搬送量)に応じて調整される。紙幣Bの挿入量が大きいほど、一時把持部93は第2水平方向においてテープTから離れていく。この例では、紙幣Bの挿入量が少ないので、一時把持部93は、前記実施形態に比べてテープTの近くに位置している。つまり、一時把持部93は、紙幣Bの挿入量が少ないほど、テープTの近くで紙幣Bを把持する。その結果、紙幣Bの挿入量が少ない場合であっても、一時把持部93は、紙幣Bを適切に把持することができる。 Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the longitudinal direction center of the banknote B is bundled, it is not restricted to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 25, the bills B may be bundled so that the edge of the tape T is located at the center of the bill B in the longitudinal direction. In this case, as shown in FIG. 25A, the amount by which the second transport unit 8 transports the bill B into the large tape ring L2 is adjusted. That is, compared with the said embodiment, the conveyance amount of the banknote B decreases. Here, the position of the temporary holding part 93 is adjusted according to the insertion amount (namely, conveyance amount) of the banknote into the large tape ring L2 by the 2nd conveyance part 8. FIG. The temporary gripping portion 93 moves away from the tape T in the second horizontal direction as the insertion amount of the bill B increases. In this example, since the insertion amount of the banknote B is small, the temporary holding part 93 is located near the tape T compared with the said embodiment. That is, the temporary gripping part 93 grips the banknote B near the tape T as the insertion amount of the banknote B is small. As a result, even when the insertion amount of the bill B is small, the temporary gripping portion 93 can appropriately grip the bill B.
 また、前記実施形態では、押印部98は、紙幣Bの下方に配置され、紙幣Bの集積方向からテープTに押印しているが、これに限られるものではない。押印部98は、任意の場所に配置してもよい。また、押印部98は、任意の方向からテープTに押印するようにしてもよい。例えば、押印部98は、集積方向と直交する方向からテープTに押印してもよい。ただし、押印部98が結束部9において紙幣BにテープTが巻き付けられた状態で該テープTに押印する構成であれば、テープTへの押印位置を略一定にすることができる。つまり、紙幣Bが結束部9から搬送された後でテープTに押印する場合には、紙幣Bの位置及びテープTの位置を検知及び規制する必要がある。しかし、結束部9においては、紙幣Bの位置が一定であり、且つ、紙幣Bに巻き付けられるテープTの位置も一定である。そのため、結束部9において紙幣BにテープTが巻き付けられた状態であれば、紙幣Bの位置及びテープTの位置の検知及び規制をしなくても、テープTへの押印位置を略一定にすることができる。 Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the stamp part 98 is arrange | positioned under the banknote B and is stamped on the tape T from the stacking direction of the banknote B, it is not restricted to this. The stamp part 98 may be arranged at an arbitrary place. Moreover, you may make it the stamp part 98 stamp on the tape T from arbitrary directions. For example, the stamp portion 98 may stamp the tape T from a direction orthogonal to the stacking direction. However, if the stamping portion 98 is configured to stamp the tape T in a state where the tape T is wound around the banknote B in the bundling portion 9, the stamping position on the tape T can be made substantially constant. That is, when the bill B is imprinted on the tape T after being transported from the binding unit 9, it is necessary to detect and regulate the position of the bill B and the position of the tape T. However, in the binding part 9, the position of the banknote B is constant, and the position of the tape T wound around the banknote B is also constant. Therefore, if the tape T is wound around the banknote B in the bundling portion 9, the stamped position on the tape T is made substantially constant without detecting and regulating the position of the banknote B and the position of the tape T. be able to.
 さらに、前記実施形態では、ヒータ95による接合処理及びカッタ96による切断処理と押印部98による押印処理とを並行して行っているが、これに限られるものではない。例えば、ヒータ95による接合処理及びカッタ96による切断処理と押印部98による押印処理とが時間的に完全にずれていてもよいし、時間的に一部だけ重複していてもよいし、一方の処理が他方の処理に対して時間的に完全に重複していてもよい。 Furthermore, in the embodiment, the joining process by the heater 95 and the cutting process by the cutter 96 and the stamping process by the stamping part 98 are performed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the joining process by the heater 95 and the cutting process by the cutter 96 and the stamping process by the stamping part 98 may be completely shifted in time, or may be partially overlapped in time. A process may completely overlap in time with respect to the other process.
 また、前記実施形態では、結束スタッカ4に集積された紙幣をステージ41を上昇させることによって圧縮しているが、これに限られるものではない。例えば、紙幣を上から下へ圧縮する押圧部を結束スタッカ4に別途設けてもよい。 Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the banknote integrated | stacked on the binding stacker 4 is compressed by raising the stage 41, it is not restricted to this. For example, you may provide the press part which compresses a banknote from the top to the bundling stacker 4 separately.
 また、第2搬送部8は、ステージ41と天板44とで圧縮された紙幣Bをさらに圧縮して挟持しているが、これに限られるものではない。第2搬送部8は、ステージ41と天板44とで圧縮された紙幣Bをステージ41及び天板44と同じ圧縮力で挟持するものであってもよい。その場合、ステージ41は、第2搬送部8が紙幣を挟持した後に下降して該紙幣の圧縮を解除するようにしてもよい。その結果、ステージ41と天板44とで圧縮した紙幣Bを第2搬送部8にスムーズに受け渡すことができる。また、第2搬送部8が該紙幣を結束スタッカ4から容易に引き出すことができる。 Moreover, although the 2nd conveyance part 8 is compressing and clamping the banknote B compressed with the stage 41 and the top plate 44, it is not restricted to this. The second transport unit 8 may sandwich the banknote B compressed by the stage 41 and the top plate 44 with the same compressive force as the stage 41 and the top plate 44. In that case, you may make it the stage 41 descend | fall after the 2nd conveyance part 8 clamps a banknote, and may cancel | release compression of this banknote. As a result, the banknote B compressed by the stage 41 and the top plate 44 can be smoothly delivered to the second transport unit 8. Moreover, the 2nd conveyance part 8 can pull out this banknote from the binding stacker 4 easily.
 また、前記実施形態では、結束スタッカ4に集積される紙幣の集積方向が上下方向と一致しているが、これに限られるものではない。例えば、結束スタッカ4において、紙幣を略水平方向に集積してもよい。つまり、紙幣が結束スタッカ4内に立った状態で収容される。この場合、例えば、集積された紙幣は、結束スタッカ4内の、法線が略水平方向を向く壁部に立て掛けた状態となる。このように、紙幣を略水平方向に集積させる場合、集積された紙幣の集積方向一端側には壁等の支持部が設けられ、該支持部により集積された紙幣を支えている。このような構成の場合、紙幣の集積が完了したときには、支持部とは反対側から紙幣をその集積方向に押圧する圧縮部が設けられる。圧縮部と支持部により、集積された紙幣はその集積方向、即ち、略水平方向に圧縮される。 In the embodiment, the stacking direction of the banknotes stacked on the bundling stacker 4 coincides with the vertical direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the bundling stacker 4, banknotes may be stacked in a substantially horizontal direction. That is, the banknotes are accommodated while standing in the binding stacker 4. In this case, for example, the accumulated banknotes are in a state of leaning against a wall portion in the binding stacker 4 whose normal is directed in a substantially horizontal direction. In this way, when stacking banknotes in a substantially horizontal direction, a support portion such as a wall is provided at one end side of the stacked banknotes in the stacking direction, and the stacked banknotes are supported. In such a configuration, when the stacking of banknotes is completed, a compression unit that presses the banknotes in the stacking direction from the side opposite to the support unit is provided. The stacked banknotes are compressed in the stacking direction, that is, in a substantially horizontal direction by the compression unit and the support unit.
 以上説明したように、ここに開示された技術は、集積された紙葉類をテープで結束する紙葉類結束装置について有用である。 As described above, the technique disclosed herein is useful for a paper sheet bundling apparatus that binds collected paper sheets with a tape.
100  紙幣処理装置(紙葉類結束装置)
4    結束スタッカ(集積部)
41   ステージ(圧縮部)
44   天板(圧縮部)
7    第1搬送部
8    第2搬送部(紙葉類搬送部)
9    結束部
92   テープ輪作成部
920  送り出しローラ対(送り出し部)
921  テープ把持部
925  ガイド部
926  下ガイド部
926a 側壁
926e 第3テープセンサ(落下検知センサ)
927  第1側方ガイド部(側方ガイド部)
928  第2側方ガイド部(側方ガイド部)
9211 第2テープセンサ(テープ輪検知センサ)
93   一時把持部
94   クランプ部
941  固定上クランプ部
942  可動上クランプ部
943  下クランプ部
944  下クランプ部
95   ヒータ(接合部)
96   カッタ(切断部)
97   印字部
B    紙幣(紙葉類)
L    テープ輪
L1   小テープ輪
L2   大テープ輪
T    テープ
100 banknote processing device (paper sheet binding device)
4 Bundling stacker (stacking unit)
41 stages (compression unit)
44 Top plate (compression unit)
7 1st conveyance part 8 2nd conveyance part (paper sheet conveyance part)
9 Bundling portion 92 Tape ring creating portion 920 Sending roller pair (feeding portion)
921 Tape gripping part 925 Guide part 926 Lower guide part 926a Side wall 926e Third tape sensor (fall detection sensor)
927 1st side guide part (side guide part)
928 Second side guide (side guide)
9211 Second tape sensor (tape ring detection sensor)
93 Temporary gripping part 94 Clamp part 941 Fixed upper clamp part 942 Movable upper clamp part 943 Lower clamp part 944 Lower clamp part 95 Heater (joint part)
96 Cutter (cutting part)
97 Printing part B Banknotes (paper sheets)
L Tape ring L1 Small tape ring L2 Large tape ring T Tape

Claims (8)

  1.  集積された紙葉類をテープで結束する紙葉類結束装置であって、
     集積された紙葉類を集積方向の両側から圧縮するクランプ部と、
     前記クランプ部で圧縮した紙葉類を前記テープで結束する結束部と、
     前記テープに押印する押印部とを備え、
     前記押印部は、前記クランプ部で前記紙葉類を圧縮し且つ該紙葉類に前記テープを巻き付けた状態で該テープに押印する紙葉類結束装置。
    A paper sheet bundling device for bundling accumulated paper sheets with a tape,
    A clamp for compressing the accumulated paper sheets from both sides in the accumulation direction;
    A bundling unit for bundling the paper sheets compressed by the clamp unit with the tape;
    A stamping part for stamping the tape,
    The paper sheet binding device, wherein the stamping unit compresses the paper sheet by the clamp unit and seals the tape while the tape is wound around the paper sheet.
  2.  請求項1に記載の紙葉類結束装置において、
     前記押印部は、前記集積方向から押印する紙葉類結束装置。
    In the paper sheet binding apparatus according to claim 1,
    The stamp unit is a paper sheet bundling device that stamps from the stacking direction.
  3.  請求項2に記載の紙葉類結束装置において、
     前記テープを前記紙葉類に巻き付けた状態で該テープ同士を接合する接合部と、
     前記テープを前記紙葉類に巻き付けられていない位置で切断する切断部とを備え、
     前記接合部及び切断部は、前記紙葉類の前記集積方向の一方側に配置され、
     前記押印部は、前記紙葉類の前記集積方向の他方側に配置されている紙葉類結束装置。
    In the paper sheet bundling device according to claim 2,
    A joining portion for joining the tapes in a state where the tape is wound around the paper sheet;
    A cutting section for cutting the tape at a position where the tape is not wrapped around the paper sheet,
    The joining part and the cutting part are arranged on one side of the stacking direction of the paper sheets,
    The paper sheet binding device, wherein the stamping part is disposed on the other side of the paper sheets in the stacking direction.
  4.  請求項1又は2に記載の紙葉類結束装置において、
     前記テープを前記紙葉類に巻き付けた状態で該テープ同士を接合する接合部と、
     前記テープを前記紙葉類に巻き付けられていない位置で切断する切断部とを備え、
     前記押印部による押印処理の少なくとも一部は、前記接合部による接合処理及び/又は前記切断部による切断処理と時間的に重複して行われる紙葉類結束装置。
    In the paper sheet binding apparatus according to claim 1 or 2,
    A joining portion for joining the tapes in a state where the tape is wound around the paper sheet;
    A cutting section for cutting the tape at a position where the tape is not wrapped around the paper sheet,
    A paper sheet bundling apparatus in which at least a part of the stamping process by the stamping part is performed in a time-overlapping manner with the joining process by the joining part and / or the cutting process by the cutting part.
  5.  請求項1に記載の紙葉類結束装置において、
     前記押印部は、前記集積方向と直交する方向から押印する紙葉類結束装置。
    In the paper sheet binding apparatus according to claim 1,
    The paper sheet bundling device, wherein the stamping unit stamps from a direction orthogonal to the stacking direction.
  6.  請求項1乃至5の何れか1つに記載の紙葉類結束装置において、
     前記テープを前記紙葉類に巻き付ける際に該テープの幅方向の位置を規制する一対の側壁を有するガイド部を備え、
     前記押印部は、前記一対の側壁の間に配置されている紙葉類結束装置。
    In the paper sheet bundling device according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
    A guide portion having a pair of side walls for regulating the position of the tape in the width direction when the tape is wound around the paper sheet;
    The stamp unit is a paper sheet binding device disposed between the pair of side walls.
  7.  請求項1乃至6の何れか1つに記載の紙葉類結束装置において、
     前記テープに印字する印字部を備え、
     前記押印部及び前記印字部は、該押印部による押印の位置と該印字部による印字とが前記テープの幅方向にずれて互いに重なり合わないように配置されている紙葉類結束装置。
    The paper sheet bundling device according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
    A printing unit for printing on the tape;
    The paper sheet bundling device, wherein the stamp unit and the printing unit are arranged so that the position of the stamp by the stamp unit and the printing by the printing unit are shifted in the width direction of the tape and do not overlap each other.
  8.  請求項1乃至7の何れか1つに記載の紙葉類結束装置において、
     前記結束部は、前記テープでテープ輪を作成し、前記紙葉類が該テープ輪の中に配置された後に該テープを引き戻して該テープを該紙葉類に巻き付けるテープ輪作成部を有し、
     前記テープ輪作成部は、前記テープ輪を作成する際に前記テープを送り出す送り出し部を有し、該テープ輪を該送り出し部よりも低い位置に形成する紙葉類結束装置。
    In the paper sheet binding apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
    The bundling section has a tape loop creating section that creates a tape loop with the tape, pulls the tape back after the paper sheets are arranged in the tape loop, and winds the tape around the paper sheets. ,
    The paper sheet bundling device, wherein the tape loop creating section includes a feed section that feeds the tape when creating the tape loop, and forms the tape loop at a position lower than the feed section.
PCT/JP2014/003918 2013-07-31 2014-07-24 Paper-sheet-binding device WO2015015781A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201480034504.3A CN105307942B (en) 2013-07-31 2014-07-24 Paper binding apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013159147A JP6259602B2 (en) 2013-07-31 2013-07-31 Paper sheet bundling device
JP2013-159147 2013-07-31

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015015781A1 true WO2015015781A1 (en) 2015-02-05

Family

ID=52431339

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2014/003918 WO2015015781A1 (en) 2013-07-31 2014-07-24 Paper-sheet-binding device

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6259602B2 (en)
CN (1) CN105307942B (en)
WO (1) WO2015015781A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018068082A1 (en) * 2016-10-11 2018-04-19 Effusiontech Pty Ltd A method of forming 3d objects.

Families Citing this family (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6499483B2 (en) * 2015-03-20 2019-04-10 グローリー株式会社 Bundling device and bundling method
JP6472699B2 (en) * 2015-03-31 2019-02-20 グローリー株式会社 Banding mechanism and paper sheet processing apparatus
KR102485083B1 (en) * 2022-03-14 2023-01-05 (주)프레시팜 Method of managing fresh food sales platform using titer for fresh food packaging that improves user convenience and forms solid and neat finish by unwinding, binding, and fusion of tapes
KR102485020B1 (en) * 2022-03-14 2023-01-05 (주)프레시팜 Method of managing fresh food sales platform using titer for fresh food packaging that improves user convenience and forms solid and neat finish by unwinding, binding, and fusion of tapes

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS59163113A (en) * 1983-03-07 1984-09-14 畑谷 寛 Bundling device by tape
JPS6423916A (en) * 1987-07-17 1989-01-26 Laurel Bank Machine Co Sealing indicating apparatus of paper money counter having function discriminating paper money of different kind
JPH05229518A (en) * 1992-02-25 1993-09-07 Toshiba Corp Ticket controlling device
JPH08253206A (en) * 1995-03-15 1996-10-01 Musashi Eng Co Ltd Wrapping device of note
JPH08324511A (en) * 1995-06-05 1996-12-10 Laurel Bank Mach Co Ltd Binding machine for paper leaf
JP2000062720A (en) * 1998-08-20 2000-02-29 Laurel Bank Mach Co Ltd Paper leaves binder
JP2011165100A (en) * 2010-02-12 2011-08-25 Oki Electric Industry Co Ltd Bill rearrangement device

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS62135123A (en) * 1985-12-05 1987-06-18 日立電子エンジニアリング株式会社 Paper bundle sealing device
JP2003146304A (en) * 2001-11-08 2003-05-21 Strapack Corp Printing method and packaging machine
CN101763686A (en) * 2008-12-26 2010-06-30 上海龙润机电科技有限公司 Money counting/strapping integrated working method for multinational currency and device thereof

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS59163113A (en) * 1983-03-07 1984-09-14 畑谷 寛 Bundling device by tape
JPS6423916A (en) * 1987-07-17 1989-01-26 Laurel Bank Machine Co Sealing indicating apparatus of paper money counter having function discriminating paper money of different kind
JPH05229518A (en) * 1992-02-25 1993-09-07 Toshiba Corp Ticket controlling device
JPH08253206A (en) * 1995-03-15 1996-10-01 Musashi Eng Co Ltd Wrapping device of note
JPH08324511A (en) * 1995-06-05 1996-12-10 Laurel Bank Mach Co Ltd Binding machine for paper leaf
JP2000062720A (en) * 1998-08-20 2000-02-29 Laurel Bank Mach Co Ltd Paper leaves binder
JP2011165100A (en) * 2010-02-12 2011-08-25 Oki Electric Industry Co Ltd Bill rearrangement device

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018068082A1 (en) * 2016-10-11 2018-04-19 Effusiontech Pty Ltd A method of forming 3d objects.
CN109843591A (en) * 2016-10-11 2019-06-04 易福仁科技私人有限公司 The method for forming 3D object
CN109843591B (en) * 2016-10-11 2022-02-08 易福仁科技知产私人有限公司 Method of forming 3D object

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN105307942B (en) 2017-08-29
CN105307942A (en) 2016-02-03
JP2015030468A (en) 2015-02-16
JP6259602B2 (en) 2018-01-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR101519195B1 (en) Accumulating and strapping apparatus
JP6259602B2 (en) Paper sheet bundling device
WO2016031248A1 (en) Paper sheet processing device
WO2015136890A1 (en) Paper sheet processing device
JP6162524B2 (en) Paper sheet bundling device
WO2015141162A1 (en) Paper sheet processing device
WO2014148000A1 (en) Paper currency-processing device
JP6320699B2 (en) Paper sheet bundling apparatus and error recovery method for paper sheet bundling apparatus
JP6325219B2 (en) Paper sheet processing system and paper sheet processing method
WO2016031176A1 (en) Paper sheet processing apparatus
JP5789562B2 (en) Paper sheet handling equipment and automatic transaction equipment
JP6292954B2 (en) Paper sheet processing equipment
WO2015155999A1 (en) Paper sheet processing device
WO2015015534A1 (en) Paper currency processing device
JP6230936B2 (en) Paper sheet processing equipment
JP2015203902A (en) Paper sheet processing device
JP6472593B2 (en) Banknote handling machine
WO2015015535A1 (en) Bill handling system, bill handing apparatus, and bill handling method
JP4488541B2 (en) Paper sheet bundling device
JP6230940B2 (en) Paper sheet processing equipment
JP2015199524A (en) Paper processing apparatus
JP2016091505A (en) Paper sheet processing device and paper sheet processing method
JPH08161580A (en) Paper money storage device
JP2000190913A (en) Device for binding sheets
JP2014182486A (en) Banknote handling apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 201480034504.3

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14832512

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14832512

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1